tandem/camper
tandem
/
camper
2
0
Fork 0
Code Issues 7 Pull Requests Packages Projects Releases Wiki Activity
camper/po/es.po

1764 lines
50 KiB
Plaintext
Raw Normal View History

Add the skeleton of the web application It does nothing more than to server a single page that does nothing interesting. This time i do not use a router. Instead, i am trying out a technique i have seen in an article[0] that i have tried in other, smaller, projects and seems to work surprisingly well: it just “cuts off” the URI path by path, passing the request from handler to handler until it finds its way to a handler that actually serves the request. That helps to loosen the coupling between the application and lower handlers, and makes dependencies explicit, because i need to pass the locale, company, etc. down instead of storing them in contexts. Let’s see if i do not regret it on a later date. I also made a lot more packages that in Numerus. In Numerus i actually only have the single pkg package, and it works, kind of, but i notice how i name my methods to avoid clashing instead of using packages for that. That is, instead of pkg.NewApp i now have app.New. Initially i thought that Locale should be inside app, but then there was a circular dependency between app and template. That is why i created a separate package, but now i am wondering if template should be inside app too, but then i would have app.MustRenderTemplate instead of template.MustRender. The CSS is the most bare-bones file i could write because i am focusing in markup right now; Oriol will fill in the file once the application is working. [0]: https://blog.merovius.de/posts/2017-06-18-how-not-to-use-an-http-router/
2023-07-22 22:11:00 +00:00
# Spanish translations for camper package
# Traducciones al español para el paquete camper.
# Copyright (C) 2023 THE camper'S COPYRIGHT HOLDER
# This file is distributed under the same license as the camper package.
# jordi fita mas <jordi@tandem.blog>, 2023.
#
msgid ""
msgstr ""
"Project-Id-Version: camper\n"
"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: jordi@tandem.blog\n"
Use I18nInput instead of L10nInput to translate carousels
2024-01-12 18:33:44 +00:00
"POT-Creation-Date: 2024-01-12 19:19+0100\n"
Add the skeleton of the web application It does nothing more than to server a single page that does nothing interesting. This time i do not use a router. Instead, i am trying out a technique i have seen in an article[0] that i have tried in other, smaller, projects and seems to work surprisingly well: it just “cuts off” the URI path by path, passing the request from handler to handler until it finds its way to a handler that actually serves the request. That helps to loosen the coupling between the application and lower handlers, and makes dependencies explicit, because i need to pass the locale, company, etc. down instead of storing them in contexts. Let’s see if i do not regret it on a later date. I also made a lot more packages that in Numerus. In Numerus i actually only have the single pkg package, and it works, kind of, but i notice how i name my methods to avoid clashing instead of using packages for that. That is, instead of pkg.NewApp i now have app.New. Initially i thought that Locale should be inside app, but then there was a circular dependency between app and template. That is why i created a separate package, but now i am wondering if template should be inside app too, but then i would have app.MustRenderTemplate instead of template.MustRender. The CSS is the most bare-bones file i could write because i am focusing in markup right now; Oriol will fill in the file once the application is working. [0]: https://blog.merovius.de/posts/2017-06-18-how-not-to-use-an-http-router/
2023-07-22 22:11:00 +00:00
"PO-Revision-Date: 2023-07-22 23:46+0200\n"
"Last-Translator: jordi fita mas <jordi@tandem.blog>\n"
"Language-Team: Spanish <es@tp.org.es>\n"
"Language: es\n"
"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n"
"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
"Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=(n != 1);\n"
Add the first draft of the booking and payment forms The form is based on the one in the current website, but in a single page instead of split into many pages; possibly each <fieldset> should be in a separate page/view. The idea is for Oriol to check the design and decide how it would be presented to the user, so i needed something to show him first. I hardcoded the **test** data for the customer’s Redsys account. Is this bad? I hope not, but i am not really, really sure. The data sent to Redsys is just a placeholder because there are booking details that i do not know, like what i have to do with the “teenagers” field or the area preferences, thus i can not yet have a booking relation. Nevertheless, had to generate a random order number up to 12-chars in length or Redsys would refuse the payment, claiming that the order is duplicated. The Redsys package is based on the PHP code provided by Redsys themselves, plus some hints at the implementations from various Go packages that did not know why they were so complicated. Had to grant select on table country to guest in order to show the select with the country options. I have changed the “Postal code” input in taxDetails for “Postcode” because this is the spell that it is used in the current web, i did not see a reason to change it—it is an accepted form—, and i did not want to have inconsistencies between forms.
2023-10-19 19:37:34 +00:00
#: web/templates/public/payment/success.gohtml:6
#: web/templates/public/payment/success.gohtml:11
msgctxt "title"
msgid "Payment Successful"
msgstr "Pago con éxito"
#: web/templates/public/payment/request.gohtml:6
#: web/templates/public/payment/request.gohtml:11
msgctxt "title"
msgid "Payment"
msgstr "Pago"
Remove “Party Details” from booking form, and stylize it a bit
2023-12-12 22:16:04 +00:00
#: web/templates/public/payment/request.gohtml:23
Add the first draft of the booking and payment forms The form is based on the one in the current website, but in a single page instead of split into many pages; possibly each <fieldset> should be in a separate page/view. The idea is for Oriol to check the design and decide how it would be presented to the user, so i needed something to show him first. I hardcoded the **test** data for the customer’s Redsys account. Is this bad? I hope not, but i am not really, really sure. The data sent to Redsys is just a placeholder because there are booking details that i do not know, like what i have to do with the “teenagers” field or the area preferences, thus i can not yet have a booking relation. Nevertheless, had to generate a random order number up to 12-chars in length or Redsys would refuse the payment, claiming that the order is duplicated. The Redsys package is based on the PHP code provided by Redsys themselves, plus some hints at the implementations from various Go packages that did not know why they were so complicated. Had to grant select on table country to guest in order to show the select with the country options. I have changed the “Postal code” input in taxDetails for “Postcode” because this is the spell that it is used in the current web, i did not see a reason to change it—it is an accepted form—, and i did not want to have inconsistencies between forms.
2023-10-19 19:37:34 +00:00
msgctxt "action"
msgid "Pay"
msgstr "Pagar"
#: web/templates/public/payment/failure.gohtml:6
#: web/templates/public/payment/failure.gohtml:11
msgctxt "title"
msgid "Payment Failed"
msgstr "Pago fallido"
Add the services page This page is more or less similar to home, in terms of database: it has a carousel and a list of items; in this case, the definition of campsite services. As i said early, when adding the home carousel, this carousel has its own relation and set of functions to manage slides. They are also duplicated in Go code, but i think i will need to refactor it later to a carousel package or something like that, because both relations have the exact same fields and types, so it makes no sense to have twice the same code. I already did it with the CSS and JavaScript code, mostly because it was easier to replace the `.surroundings div` selector with `.carousel`, and because that way i can have a single template that loads and initializes Slick. There is no UI to create or edit service definitions, although there are the SQL functions, because i have no more time now, and Oriol needs to check that the style is correct for that page.
2023-09-17 01:42:16 +00:00
#: web/templates/public/services.gohtml:6
#: web/templates/public/services.gohtml:15
Add management of legal texts
2023-12-22 01:23:18 +00:00
#: web/templates/public/layout.gohtml:66 web/templates/public/layout.gohtml:94
Use I18nInput instead of L10nInput to translate carousels
2024-01-12 18:33:44 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/services/index.gohtml:56
Add the services page This page is more or less similar to home, in terms of database: it has a carousel and a list of items; in this case, the definition of campsite services. As i said early, when adding the home carousel, this carousel has its own relation and set of functions to manage slides. They are also duplicated in Go code, but i think i will need to refactor it later to a carousel package or something like that, because both relations have the exact same fields and types, so it makes no sense to have twice the same code. I already did it with the CSS and JavaScript code, mostly because it was easier to replace the `.surroundings div` selector with `.carousel`, and because that way i can have a single template that loads and initializes Slick. There is no UI to create or edit service definitions, although there are the SQL functions, because i have no more time now, and Oriol needs to check that the style is correct for that page.
2023-09-17 01:42:16 +00:00
msgctxt "title"
msgid "Services"
msgstr "Servicios"
#: web/templates/public/services.gohtml:18
msgid "The campsite offers many different services."
msgstr "El camping dispone de varios servicios."
Replace contact page with location Customer does not want a contact page, but a page where they can write the direction on how to reach the campground, with a Google map embed instead of using Leaflet, because Google Maps shows the reviews right in the map. That means i had to replace the GPS locations with XML fields for the customer to write. In all four languages. This time i tried a translation approach inspired by PrestaShop: instead of opening a new page for each language, i have all languages in the same page and use AlpineJS to show just a single language. It is far easier to write the translations, even though you do not have the source text visible, specially in this section that there is no place for me to put the language links.
2023-12-21 20:17:04 +00:00
#: web/templates/public/location.gohtml:6
#: web/templates/public/location.gohtml:12
Add management of legal texts
2023-12-22 01:23:18 +00:00
#: web/templates/public/layout.gohtml:68 web/templates/public/layout.gohtml:96
Replace contact page with location Customer does not want a contact page, but a page where they can write the direction on how to reach the campground, with a Google map embed instead of using Leaflet, because Google Maps shows the reviews right in the map. That means i had to replace the GPS locations with XML fields for the customer to write. In all four languages. This time i tried a translation approach inspired by PrestaShop: instead of opening a new page for each language, i have all languages in the same page and use AlpineJS to show just a single language. It is far easier to write the translations, even though you do not have the source text visible, specially in this section that there is no place for me to put the language links.
2023-12-21 20:17:04 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/layout.gohtml:60
msgctxt "title"
msgid "Location"
msgstr "Cómo llegar"
Add management of legal texts
2023-12-22 01:23:18 +00:00
#: web/templates/public/home.gohtml:6 web/templates/public/layout.gohtml:52
#: web/templates/public/layout.gohtml:92
Split templates and handlers into admin and public I need to check that the user is an employee (or admin) in administration handlers, but i do not want to do it for each handler, because i am bound to forget it. Thus, i added the /admin sub-path for these resources. The public-facing web is the rest of the resources outside /admin, but for now there is only home, to test whether it works as expected or not. The public-facing web can not relay on the user’s language settings, as the guest user has no way to set that. I would be happy to just use the Accept-Language header for that, but apparently Google does not use that header[0], and they give four alternatives: a country-specific domain, a subdomain with a generic top-level domain (gTLD), subdirectories with a gTLD, or URL parameters (e.g., site.com?loc=de). Of the four, Google does not recommend URL parameters, and the customer is already using subdirectories with the current site, therefor that’s what i have chosen. Google also tells me that it is a very good idea to have links between localized version of the same resources, either with <link> elements, Link HTTP response headers, or a sitemap file[1]; they are all equivalent in the eyes of Google. I have choosen the Link response headers way, because for that i can simply “augment” ResponseHeader to automatically add these headers when the response status is 2xx, otherwise i would need to pass down the original URL path until it reaches the template. Even though Camper is supposed to be a “generic”, multi-company application, i think i will stick to the easiest route and write the templates for just the “first” customer. [0]: https://developers.google.com/search/docs/specialty/international/managing-multi-regional-sites [1]: https://developers.google.com/search/docs/specialty/international/localized-versions
2023-08-05 01:42:37 +00:00
msgctxt "title"
msgid "Home"
msgstr "Inicio"
Add the sample campsite types to the demo file Since campsite types need a media, i have to insert also images to the media relation. The best would be to use PostgreSQL’s pg_read_binary_file to read the media content from actual files when inserting the new rows, but the files need to be within the database cluster directory, or have to use an absolute path when running as a superuser to read from files outside the cluster directory, which means that it would depend on the path where i leave the files, that is different in development that in staging. To avoid that problem i can simply insert the rows using their base64 strings, with PostgreSQL’s decode. The images are kind of small, but i was worried that each change in demo.sql would duplicate that data in git, even if the change is not related to the images, because git stores the whole file; even if small, soon everything adds up. I do not care if the _final_ demo.sql is big, as this file is packaged in a different deb and is only installed in staging, so i’ve chosen to use m4 to build a single “amalgamated” SQL file from the base .sql file and the individual image files converted to base64 strings. That way, each image is individually managed by git and the base .sql file does not balloon up for each little change. Changed m4’s quotes to [[ ]] because the default ` ' was interfering with Intellij’s syntax highlighting.
2023-09-10 01:57:46 +00:00
#: web/templates/public/home.gohtml:17
Add the first test for the front end design As previously stated, web made the design with an external tool and had to “convert” it to proper CSS and HTML markup. Unfortunately, the original design uses slick, that requires jQuery; i can’t do anything about it now. Disabled most of the menu and language switcher because it is not in the design yet.
2023-09-05 02:40:48 +00:00
msgid "The pleasure of camping in the middle of nature…"
msgstr "El placer de acampar en plena naturaleza…"
Add the sample campsite types to the demo file Since campsite types need a media, i have to insert also images to the media relation. The best would be to use PostgreSQL’s pg_read_binary_file to read the media content from actual files when inserting the new rows, but the files need to be within the database cluster directory, or have to use an absolute path when running as a superuser to read from files outside the cluster directory, which means that it would depend on the path where i leave the files, that is different in development that in staging. To avoid that problem i can simply insert the rows using their base64 strings, with PostgreSQL’s decode. The images are kind of small, but i was worried that each change in demo.sql would duplicate that data in git, even if the change is not related to the images, because git stores the whole file; even if small, soon everything adds up. I do not care if the _final_ demo.sql is big, as this file is packaged in a different deb and is only installed in staging, so i’ve chosen to use m4 to build a single “amalgamated” SQL file from the base .sql file and the individual image files converted to base64 strings. That way, each image is individually managed by git and the base .sql file does not balloon up for each little change. Changed m4’s quotes to [[ ]] because the default ` ' was interfering with Intellij’s syntax highlighting.
2023-09-10 01:57:46 +00:00
#: web/templates/public/home.gohtml:18
Add the first test for the front end design As previously stated, web made the design with an external tool and had to “convert” it to proper CSS and HTML markup. Unfortunately, the original design uses slick, that requires jQuery; i can’t do anything about it now. Disabled most of the menu and language switcher because it is not in the design yet.
2023-09-05 02:40:48 +00:00
msgctxt "link"
msgid "Booking"
msgstr "Reservar"
Add the sample campsite types to the demo file Since campsite types need a media, i have to insert also images to the media relation. The best would be to use PostgreSQL’s pg_read_binary_file to read the media content from actual files when inserting the new rows, but the files need to be within the database cluster directory, or have to use an absolute path when running as a superuser to read from files outside the cluster directory, which means that it would depend on the path where i leave the files, that is different in development that in staging. To avoid that problem i can simply insert the rows using their base64 strings, with PostgreSQL’s decode. The images are kind of small, but i was worried that each change in demo.sql would duplicate that data in git, even if the change is not related to the images, because git stores the whole file; even if small, soon everything adds up. I do not care if the _final_ demo.sql is big, as this file is packaged in a different deb and is only installed in staging, so i’ve chosen to use m4 to build a single “amalgamated” SQL file from the base .sql file and the individual image files converted to base64 strings. That way, each image is individually managed by git and the base .sql file does not balloon up for each little change. Changed m4’s quotes to [[ ]] because the default ` ' was interfering with Intellij’s syntax highlighting.
2023-09-10 01:57:46 +00:00
#: web/templates/public/home.gohtml:31
Add the first test for the front end design As previously stated, web made the design with an external tool and had to “convert” it to proper CSS and HTML markup. Unfortunately, the original design uses slick, that requires jQuery; i can’t do anything about it now. Disabled most of the menu and language switcher because it is not in the design yet.
2023-09-05 02:40:48 +00:00
msgid "Our services"
msgstr "Nuestros servicios"
Add position to campsite type features
2023-12-21 16:33:01 +00:00
#: web/templates/public/home.gohtml:33
msgid "Come and enjoy!"
msgstr "¡Ven a disfrutar!"
#: web/templates/public/home.gohtml:35
Add the services page This page is more or less similar to home, in terms of database: it has a carousel and a list of items; in this case, the definition of campsite services. As i said early, when adding the home carousel, this carousel has its own relation and set of functions to manage slides. They are also duplicated in Go code, but i think i will need to refactor it later to a carousel package or something like that, because both relations have the exact same fields and types, so it makes no sense to have twice the same code. I already did it with the CSS and JavaScript code, mostly because it was easier to replace the `.surroundings div` selector with `.carousel`, and because that way i can have a single template that loads and initializes Slick. There is no UI to create or edit service definitions, although there are the SQL functions, because i have no more time now, and Oriol needs to check that the style is correct for that page.
2023-09-17 01:42:16 +00:00
#: web/templates/public/surroundings.gohtml:6
#: web/templates/public/surroundings.gohtml:10
Add management of legal texts
2023-12-22 01:23:18 +00:00
#: web/templates/public/layout.gohtml:67 web/templates/public/layout.gohtml:95
Add the services page This page is more or less similar to home, in terms of database: it has a carousel and a list of items; in this case, the definition of campsite services. As i said early, when adding the home carousel, this carousel has its own relation and set of functions to manage slides. They are also duplicated in Go code, but i think i will need to refactor it later to a carousel package or something like that, because both relations have the exact same fields and types, so it makes no sense to have twice the same code. I already did it with the CSS and JavaScript code, mostly because it was easier to replace the `.surroundings div` selector with `.carousel`, and because that way i can have a single template that loads and initializes Slick. There is no UI to create or edit service definitions, although there are the SQL functions, because i have no more time now, and Oriol needs to check that the style is correct for that page.
2023-09-17 01:42:16 +00:00
msgctxt "title"
Change home’s texts to English and add Catalan and Spanish translations
2023-09-11 02:20:21 +00:00
msgid "Surroundings"
Add the services page This page is more or less similar to home, in terms of database: it has a carousel and a list of items; in this case, the definition of campsite services. As i said early, when adding the home carousel, this carousel has its own relation and set of functions to manage slides. They are also duplicated in Go code, but i think i will need to refactor it later to a carousel package or something like that, because both relations have the exact same fields and types, so it makes no sense to have twice the same code. I already did it with the CSS and JavaScript code, mostly because it was easier to replace the `.surroundings div` selector with `.carousel`, and because that way i can have a single template that loads and initializes Slick. There is no UI to create or edit service definitions, although there are the SQL functions, because i have no more time now, and Oriol needs to check that the style is correct for that page.
2023-09-17 01:42:16 +00:00
msgstr "El entorno"
Add the first test for the front end design As previously stated, web made the design with an external tool and had to “convert” it to proper CSS and HTML markup. Unfortunately, the original design uses slick, that requires jQuery; i can’t do anything about it now. Disabled most of the menu and language switcher because it is not in the design yet.
2023-09-05 02:40:48 +00:00
Add position to campsite type features
2023-12-21 16:33:01 +00:00
#: web/templates/public/home.gohtml:38
Change home’s texts to English and add Catalan and Spanish translations
2023-09-11 02:20:21 +00:00
msgid "Located in <strong>Alta Garrotxa</strong>, between the <strong>Pyrenees</strong> and the <strong>Costa Brava</strong>."
msgstr "Situados en la <strong>Alta Garrotxa</strong>, entre los <strong>Pirineos</strong> y la <strong>Costa Brava</strong>."
Add position to campsite type features
2023-12-21 16:33:01 +00:00
#: web/templates/public/home.gohtml:39
Change home’s texts to English and add Catalan and Spanish translations
2023-09-11 02:20:21 +00:00
msgid "Nearby there are the <strong>gorges of Sadernes</strong>, <strong>volcanoes</strong>, <strong>La Fageda d’en Jordà</strong>, the Jewish quarter of <strong>Besalú</strong>, the basaltic cliff of <strong>Castellfollit de la Roca</strong>… much to see and much to do."
Add the surroundings static page This page is “highly stylized”, with a masonry-like grid, that i did not know how to generate automatically from data defined in PostgreSQL, therefore with Oriol we agreed to have this one as a static page and we will see what we can do if the customer asks to be able to change it. I was a bit undecided on whether the icons in the bottom part of the page should be defined in the CSS or with style="" and CSS variables, like i do for the campsite type in the home page. At first i thought that it should use CSS variables, mostly for coherence: if another section of the web does it for its background image, why no this one. The difference is that the home page is dynamically created from the database, while this page is static and we know what icons we need, thus it makes more sense to move it to the stylesheet file, because then it will be downloaded by user agents that actually want to use it (e.g., browsers, but not Braille terminals).
2023-09-16 22:11:39 +00:00
msgstr "Cerca tenéis los <strong>piletones de Sadernes</strong>, <strong>volcanes</strong>, <strong>La Fageda d’en Jordà</strong>, la judería de <strong>Besalú</strong>, el riscal basáltico de <strong>Castellfollit de la Roca</strong>… mucho por ver y mucho por hacer."
Change home’s texts to English and add Catalan and Spanish translations
2023-09-11 02:20:21 +00:00
Add position to campsite type features
2023-12-21 16:33:01 +00:00
#: web/templates/public/home.gohtml:40
Change home’s texts to English and add Catalan and Spanish translations
2023-09-11 02:20:21 +00:00
msgid "Less than an hour from <strong>Girona</strong>, one from <strong>La Bisbal d’Empordà</strong>, and two from <strong>Barcelona</strong>."
msgstr "A menos de una hora de <strong>Girona</strong>, a una de <strong>La Bisbal d’Empordà</strong> y a dos de <strong>Barcelona</strong>."
Add position to campsite type features
2023-12-21 16:33:01 +00:00
#: web/templates/public/home.gohtml:41
Change home’s texts to English and add Catalan and Spanish translations
2023-09-11 02:20:21 +00:00
msgid "Discover the surroundings"
msgstr "Descubre el entorno"
Add the first draft of the booking and payment forms The form is based on the one in the current website, but in a single page instead of split into many pages; possibly each <fieldset> should be in a separate page/view. The idea is for Oriol to check the design and decide how it would be presented to the user, so i needed something to show him first. I hardcoded the **test** data for the customer’s Redsys account. Is this bad? I hope not, but i am not really, really sure. The data sent to Redsys is just a placeholder because there are booking details that i do not know, like what i have to do with the “teenagers” field or the area preferences, thus i can not yet have a booking relation. Nevertheless, had to generate a random order number up to 12-chars in length or Redsys would refuse the payment, claiming that the order is duplicated. The Redsys package is based on the PHP code provided by Redsys themselves, plus some hints at the implementations from various Go packages that did not know why they were so complicated. Had to grant select on table country to guest in order to show the select with the country options. I have changed the “Postal code” input in taxDetails for “Postcode” because this is the spell that it is used in the current web, i did not see a reason to change it—it is an accepted form—, and i did not want to have inconsistencies between forms.
2023-10-19 19:37:34 +00:00
#: web/templates/public/campsite/type.gohtml:41
Add the booking form to type, and style page according to design
2023-10-13 19:59:45 +00:00
msgctxt "input"
msgid "Check-in Date"
msgstr "Fecha de entrada"
Add the first draft of the booking and payment forms The form is based on the one in the current website, but in a single page instead of split into many pages; possibly each <fieldset> should be in a separate page/view. The idea is for Oriol to check the design and decide how it would be presented to the user, so i needed something to show him first. I hardcoded the **test** data for the customer’s Redsys account. Is this bad? I hope not, but i am not really, really sure. The data sent to Redsys is just a placeholder because there are booking details that i do not know, like what i have to do with the “teenagers” field or the area preferences, thus i can not yet have a booking relation. Nevertheless, had to generate a random order number up to 12-chars in length or Redsys would refuse the payment, claiming that the order is duplicated. The Redsys package is based on the PHP code provided by Redsys themselves, plus some hints at the implementations from various Go packages that did not know why they were so complicated. Had to grant select on table country to guest in order to show the select with the country options. I have changed the “Postal code” input in taxDetails for “Postcode” because this is the spell that it is used in the current web, i did not see a reason to change it—it is an accepted form—, and i did not want to have inconsistencies between forms.
2023-10-19 19:37:34 +00:00
#: web/templates/public/campsite/type.gohtml:47
Add the booking form to type, and style page according to design
2023-10-13 19:59:45 +00:00
msgctxt "input"
msgid "Check-out Date"
msgstr "Fecha de salida"
Add the first draft of the booking and payment forms The form is based on the one in the current website, but in a single page instead of split into many pages; possibly each <fieldset> should be in a separate page/view. The idea is for Oriol to check the design and decide how it would be presented to the user, so i needed something to show him first. I hardcoded the **test** data for the customer’s Redsys account. Is this bad? I hope not, but i am not really, really sure. The data sent to Redsys is just a placeholder because there are booking details that i do not know, like what i have to do with the “teenagers” field or the area preferences, thus i can not yet have a booking relation. Nevertheless, had to generate a random order number up to 12-chars in length or Redsys would refuse the payment, claiming that the order is duplicated. The Redsys package is based on the PHP code provided by Redsys themselves, plus some hints at the implementations from various Go packages that did not know why they were so complicated. Had to grant select on table country to guest in order to show the select with the country options. I have changed the “Postal code” input in taxDetails for “Postcode” because this is the spell that it is used in the current web, i did not see a reason to change it—it is an accepted form—, and i did not want to have inconsistencies between forms.
2023-10-19 19:37:34 +00:00
#: web/templates/public/campsite/type.gohtml:54
Remove “Party Details” from booking form, and stylize it a bit
2023-12-12 22:16:04 +00:00
#: web/templates/public/booking.gohtml:155
Add the booking form to type, and style page according to design
2023-10-13 19:59:45 +00:00
msgctxt "action"
msgid "Book"
msgstr "Reservar"
Updated translations
2023-12-22 02:32:40 +00:00
#: web/templates/public/campsite/type.gohtml:62
#: web/templates/admin/season/index.gohtml:59
msgctxt "title"
msgid "Calendar"
msgstr "Calendario"
#: web/templates/public/campsite/type.gohtml:73
Replace use of L10NInput with I18nInput for campsite
2024-01-10 20:52:49 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/option/form.gohtml:63
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/type/form.gohtml:78
Add the campsite type cost per season
2023-10-01 19:14:39 +00:00
msgctxt "title"
msgid "Prices"
msgstr "Precios"
Updated translations
2023-12-22 02:32:40 +00:00
#: web/templates/public/campsite/type.gohtml:83
Add the campsite type cost per season
2023-10-01 19:14:39 +00:00
msgid "%s €/night"
msgstr "%s €/noche"
Updated translations
2023-12-22 02:32:40 +00:00
#: web/templates/public/campsite/type.gohtml:85
msgid "%s: %s €/night"
msgstr "%s: %s €/noche"
#: web/templates/public/campsite/type.gohtml:88
Add the campsite type cost per season
2023-10-01 19:14:39 +00:00
msgid "*Minimum %d nights per stay"
msgstr "*Mínimo %d noches por estancia"
Updated translations
2023-12-22 02:32:40 +00:00
#: web/templates/public/campsite/type.gohtml:99
Add the list of features for campsite type
2023-10-13 18:30:31 +00:00
msgctxt "title"
msgid "Features"
msgstr "Características"
Updated translations
2023-12-22 02:32:40 +00:00
#: web/templates/public/campsite/type.gohtml:110
Add the info and facilities fields to campsite type I wish CKEditor would have support for <dl>, but it is unlikely that they will add any time soon[0], specially when in 2018 they already “forgotten”[1] that this was requested back in 2007[2]. Therefore, in the demo i did it more or less like in the original design, with “extra” <h4>, although i added them under a <h3>, to avoid “gaps” in the outline. [0]: https://github.com/ckeditor/ckeditor5/issues/775 [1]: https://github.com/ckeditor/ckeditor5/issues/775#issuecomment-358591747 [2]: https://dev.ckeditor.com/ticket/1333
2023-10-13 11:40:48 +00:00
msgctxt "title"
msgid "Info"
msgstr "Información"
Updated translations
2023-12-22 02:32:40 +00:00
#: web/templates/public/campsite/type.gohtml:114
Add the info and facilities fields to campsite type I wish CKEditor would have support for <dl>, but it is unlikely that they will add any time soon[0], specially when in 2018 they already “forgotten”[1] that this was requested back in 2007[2]. Therefore, in the demo i did it more or less like in the original design, with “extra” <h4>, although i added them under a <h3>, to avoid “gaps” in the outline. [0]: https://github.com/ckeditor/ckeditor5/issues/775 [1]: https://github.com/ckeditor/ckeditor5/issues/775#issuecomment-358591747 [2]: https://dev.ckeditor.com/ticket/1333
2023-10-13 11:40:48 +00:00
msgctxt "title"
msgid "Facilities"
msgstr "Equipamento"
Updated translations
2023-12-22 02:32:40 +00:00
#: web/templates/public/campsite/type.gohtml:118
Add the info and facilities fields to campsite type I wish CKEditor would have support for <dl>, but it is unlikely that they will add any time soon[0], specially when in 2018 they already “forgotten”[1] that this was requested back in 2007[2]. Therefore, in the demo i did it more or less like in the original design, with “extra” <h4>, although i added them under a <h3>, to avoid “gaps” in the outline. [0]: https://github.com/ckeditor/ckeditor5/issues/775 [1]: https://github.com/ckeditor/ckeditor5/issues/775#issuecomment-358591747 [2]: https://dev.ckeditor.com/ticket/1333
2023-10-13 11:40:48 +00:00
msgctxt "title"
msgid "Description"
msgstr "Descripción"
Add the first draft of the booking and payment forms The form is based on the one in the current website, but in a single page instead of split into many pages; possibly each <fieldset> should be in a separate page/view. The idea is for Oriol to check the design and decide how it would be presented to the user, so i needed something to show him first. I hardcoded the **test** data for the customer’s Redsys account. Is this bad? I hope not, but i am not really, really sure. The data sent to Redsys is just a placeholder because there are booking details that i do not know, like what i have to do with the “teenagers” field or the area preferences, thus i can not yet have a booking relation. Nevertheless, had to generate a random order number up to 12-chars in length or Redsys would refuse the payment, claiming that the order is duplicated. The Redsys package is based on the PHP code provided by Redsys themselves, plus some hints at the implementations from various Go packages that did not know why they were so complicated. Had to grant select on table country to guest in order to show the select with the country options. I have changed the “Postal code” input in taxDetails for “Postcode” because this is the spell that it is used in the current web, i did not see a reason to change it—it is an accepted form—, and i did not want to have inconsistencies between forms.
2023-10-19 19:37:34 +00:00
#: web/templates/public/campsite/calendar.gohtml:18
#: web/templates/admin/season/calendar.gohtml:16
msgctxt "day"
msgid "Mon"
msgstr "lu"
#: web/templates/public/campsite/calendar.gohtml:19
#: web/templates/admin/season/calendar.gohtml:17
msgctxt "day"
msgid "Tue"
msgstr "ma"
#: web/templates/public/campsite/calendar.gohtml:20
#: web/templates/admin/season/calendar.gohtml:18
msgctxt "day"
msgid "Wed"
msgstr "mi"
#: web/templates/public/campsite/calendar.gohtml:21
#: web/templates/admin/season/calendar.gohtml:19
msgctxt "day"
msgid "Thu"
msgstr "ju"
#: web/templates/public/campsite/calendar.gohtml:22
#: web/templates/admin/season/calendar.gohtml:20
msgctxt "day"
msgid "Fri"
msgstr "vi"
#: web/templates/public/campsite/calendar.gohtml:23
#: web/templates/admin/season/calendar.gohtml:21
msgctxt "day"
msgid "Sat"
msgstr "sá"
#: web/templates/public/campsite/calendar.gohtml:24
#: web/templates/admin/season/calendar.gohtml:22
msgctxt "day"
msgid "Sun"
msgstr "do"
Add user-defined order to campsite types, options, seasons and carousels I use Sortable, exactly like HTMx’s sorting example does[0]. Had to export the slug or ID of some entries to be able to add it in the hidden input. For forms that use ID instead of slug, had to use an input name other than “id” because otherwise the swap would fail due to bug #1496[1]. It is apparently fixed in a recent version of HTMx, but i did not want to update for fear of behaviour changes. [0]: https://htmx.org/examples/sortable/ [1]: https://github.com/bigskysoftware/htmx/issues/1496
2023-12-20 18:52:14 +00:00
#: web/templates/public/surroundings.gohtml:28
Add the surroundings static page This page is “highly stylized”, with a masonry-like grid, that i did not know how to generate automatically from data defined in PostgreSQL, therefore with Oriol we agreed to have this one as a static page and we will see what we can do if the customer asks to be able to change it. I was a bit undecided on whether the icons in the bottom part of the page should be defined in the CSS or with style="" and CSS variables, like i do for the campsite type in the home page. At first i thought that it should use CSS variables, mostly for coherence: if another section of the web does it for its background image, why no this one. The difference is that the home page is dynamically created from the database, while this page is static and we know what icons we need, thus it makes more sense to move it to the stylesheet file, because then it will be downloaded by user agents that actually want to use it (e.g., browsers, but not Braille terminals).
2023-09-16 22:11:39 +00:00
msgctxt "title"
msgid "What to Do Outside the Campsite?"
msgstr "¿Qué hacer desde el camping?"
Add user-defined order to campsite types, options, seasons and carousels I use Sortable, exactly like HTMx’s sorting example does[0]. Had to export the slug or ID of some entries to be able to add it in the hidden input. For forms that use ID instead of slug, had to use an input name other than “id” because otherwise the swap would fail due to bug #1496[1]. It is apparently fixed in a recent version of HTMx, but i did not want to update for fear of behaviour changes. [0]: https://htmx.org/examples/sortable/ [1]: https://github.com/bigskysoftware/htmx/issues/1496
2023-12-20 18:52:14 +00:00
#: web/templates/public/surroundings.gohtml:31
Add the surroundings static page This page is “highly stylized”, with a masonry-like grid, that i did not know how to generate automatically from data defined in PostgreSQL, therefore with Oriol we agreed to have this one as a static page and we will see what we can do if the customer asks to be able to change it. I was a bit undecided on whether the icons in the bottom part of the page should be defined in the CSS or with style="" and CSS variables, like i do for the campsite type in the home page. At first i thought that it should use CSS variables, mostly for coherence: if another section of the web does it for its background image, why no this one. The difference is that the home page is dynamically created from the database, while this page is static and we know what icons we need, thus it makes more sense to move it to the stylesheet file, because then it will be downloaded by user agents that actually want to use it (e.g., browsers, but not Braille terminals).
2023-09-16 22:11:39 +00:00
msgid "Campsite Montagut is an ideal starting point for quiet outings, climbing, swimming in the river and gorges, volcanoes, the Fageda d’en Jordà, cycle tours for all ages…."
msgstr "El Camping Montagut es ideal como punto de salida de excursiones tranquilas, escalada, bañarse en el río y piletones, volcanes, la Fageda d’en Jordà, salidas en bicicleta para todos los niveles…."
Add user-defined order to campsite types, options, seasons and carousels I use Sortable, exactly like HTMx’s sorting example does[0]. Had to export the slug or ID of some entries to be able to add it in the hidden input. For forms that use ID instead of slug, had to use an input name other than “id” because otherwise the swap would fail due to bug #1496[1]. It is apparently fixed in a recent version of HTMx, but i did not want to update for fear of behaviour changes. [0]: https://htmx.org/examples/sortable/ [1]: https://github.com/bigskysoftware/htmx/issues/1496
2023-12-20 18:52:14 +00:00
#: web/templates/public/surroundings.gohtml:38
Add the surroundings static page This page is “highly stylized”, with a masonry-like grid, that i did not know how to generate automatically from data defined in PostgreSQL, therefore with Oriol we agreed to have this one as a static page and we will see what we can do if the customer asks to be able to change it. I was a bit undecided on whether the icons in the bottom part of the page should be defined in the CSS or with style="" and CSS variables, like i do for the campsite type in the home page. At first i thought that it should use CSS variables, mostly for coherence: if another section of the web does it for its background image, why no this one. The difference is that the home page is dynamically created from the database, while this page is static and we know what icons we need, thus it makes more sense to move it to the stylesheet file, because then it will be downloaded by user agents that actually want to use it (e.g., browsers, but not Braille terminals).
2023-09-16 22:11:39 +00:00
msgid "Get to the Costa Brava and enjoy the beaches, the gastronomy or go kayaking…."
msgstr "Llegar hasta la Costa Brava y disfrutar de las playas, la gastronomía o ir en kayak…."
Add user-defined order to campsite types, options, seasons and carousels I use Sortable, exactly like HTMx’s sorting example does[0]. Had to export the slug or ID of some entries to be able to add it in the hidden input. For forms that use ID instead of slug, had to use an input name other than “id” because otherwise the swap would fail due to bug #1496[1]. It is apparently fixed in a recent version of HTMx, but i did not want to update for fear of behaviour changes. [0]: https://htmx.org/examples/sortable/ [1]: https://github.com/bigskysoftware/htmx/issues/1496
2023-12-20 18:52:14 +00:00
#: web/templates/public/surroundings.gohtml:47
Add the surroundings static page This page is “highly stylized”, with a masonry-like grid, that i did not know how to generate automatically from data defined in PostgreSQL, therefore with Oriol we agreed to have this one as a static page and we will see what we can do if the customer asks to be able to change it. I was a bit undecided on whether the icons in the bottom part of the page should be defined in the CSS or with style="" and CSS variables, like i do for the campsite type in the home page. At first i thought that it should use CSS variables, mostly for coherence: if another section of the web does it for its background image, why no this one. The difference is that the home page is dynamically created from the database, while this page is static and we know what icons we need, thus it makes more sense to move it to the stylesheet file, because then it will be downloaded by user agents that actually want to use it (e.g., browsers, but not Braille terminals).
2023-09-16 22:11:39 +00:00
msgid "You will also find museums in Olot, Figures, Girona."
msgstr "También encontraréis museos en Olot, Figueres, Girona."
Add user-defined order to campsite types, options, seasons and carousels I use Sortable, exactly like HTMx’s sorting example does[0]. Had to export the slug or ID of some entries to be able to add it in the hidden input. For forms that use ID instead of slug, had to use an input name other than “id” because otherwise the swap would fail due to bug #1496[1]. It is apparently fixed in a recent version of HTMx, but i did not want to update for fear of behaviour changes. [0]: https://htmx.org/examples/sortable/ [1]: https://github.com/bigskysoftware/htmx/issues/1496
2023-12-20 18:52:14 +00:00
#: web/templates/public/surroundings.gohtml:48
Add the surroundings static page This page is “highly stylized”, with a masonry-like grid, that i did not know how to generate automatically from data defined in PostgreSQL, therefore with Oriol we agreed to have this one as a static page and we will see what we can do if the customer asks to be able to change it. I was a bit undecided on whether the icons in the bottom part of the page should be defined in the CSS or with style="" and CSS variables, like i do for the campsite type in the home page. At first i thought that it should use CSS variables, mostly for coherence: if another section of the web does it for its background image, why no this one. The difference is that the home page is dynamically created from the database, while this page is static and we know what icons we need, thus it makes more sense to move it to the stylesheet file, because then it will be downloaded by user agents that actually want to use it (e.g., browsers, but not Braille terminals).
2023-09-16 22:11:39 +00:00
msgid "As well as music festivals, dance, theater…."
msgstr "Como festivales de música, danza, teatro…."
Add user-defined order to campsite types, options, seasons and carousels I use Sortable, exactly like HTMx’s sorting example does[0]. Had to export the slug or ID of some entries to be able to add it in the hidden input. For forms that use ID instead of slug, had to use an input name other than “id” because otherwise the swap would fail due to bug #1496[1]. It is apparently fixed in a recent version of HTMx, but i did not want to update for fear of behaviour changes. [0]: https://htmx.org/examples/sortable/ [1]: https://github.com/bigskysoftware/htmx/issues/1496
2023-12-20 18:52:14 +00:00
#: web/templates/public/surroundings.gohtml:54
Add the surroundings static page This page is “highly stylized”, with a masonry-like grid, that i did not know how to generate automatically from data defined in PostgreSQL, therefore with Oriol we agreed to have this one as a static page and we will see what we can do if the customer asks to be able to change it. I was a bit undecided on whether the icons in the bottom part of the page should be defined in the CSS or with style="" and CSS variables, like i do for the campsite type in the home page. At first i thought that it should use CSS variables, mostly for coherence: if another section of the web does it for its background image, why no this one. The difference is that the home page is dynamically created from the database, while this page is static and we know what icons we need, thus it makes more sense to move it to the stylesheet file, because then it will be downloaded by user agents that actually want to use it (e.g., browsers, but not Braille terminals).
2023-09-16 22:11:39 +00:00
msgctxt "title"
msgid "Once at the Campsite, We Can Inform You about What Activities are Available"
msgstr "Una vez en el camping, os podemos informar de qué actividades hacer"
Add user-defined order to campsite types, options, seasons and carousels I use Sortable, exactly like HTMx’s sorting example does[0]. Had to export the slug or ID of some entries to be able to add it in the hidden input. For forms that use ID instead of slug, had to use an input name other than “id” because otherwise the swap would fail due to bug #1496[1]. It is apparently fixed in a recent version of HTMx, but i did not want to update for fear of behaviour changes. [0]: https://htmx.org/examples/sortable/ [1]: https://github.com/bigskysoftware/htmx/issues/1496
2023-12-20 18:52:14 +00:00
#: web/templates/public/surroundings.gohtml:57
Add the surroundings static page This page is “highly stylized”, with a masonry-like grid, that i did not know how to generate automatically from data defined in PostgreSQL, therefore with Oriol we agreed to have this one as a static page and we will see what we can do if the customer asks to be able to change it. I was a bit undecided on whether the icons in the bottom part of the page should be defined in the CSS or with style="" and CSS variables, like i do for the campsite type in the home page. At first i thought that it should use CSS variables, mostly for coherence: if another section of the web does it for its background image, why no this one. The difference is that the home page is dynamically created from the database, while this page is static and we know what icons we need, thus it makes more sense to move it to the stylesheet file, because then it will be downloaded by user agents that actually want to use it (e.g., browsers, but not Braille terminals).
2023-09-16 22:11:39 +00:00
msgid "Cycle routes"
msgstr "Rutas en bicicleta"
Add user-defined order to campsite types, options, seasons and carousels I use Sortable, exactly like HTMx’s sorting example does[0]. Had to export the slug or ID of some entries to be able to add it in the hidden input. For forms that use ID instead of slug, had to use an input name other than “id” because otherwise the swap would fail due to bug #1496[1]. It is apparently fixed in a recent version of HTMx, but i did not want to update for fear of behaviour changes. [0]: https://htmx.org/examples/sortable/ [1]: https://github.com/bigskysoftware/htmx/issues/1496
2023-12-20 18:52:14 +00:00
#: web/templates/public/surroundings.gohtml:58
Add the surroundings static page This page is “highly stylized”, with a masonry-like grid, that i did not know how to generate automatically from data defined in PostgreSQL, therefore with Oriol we agreed to have this one as a static page and we will see what we can do if the customer asks to be able to change it. I was a bit undecided on whether the icons in the bottom part of the page should be defined in the CSS or with style="" and CSS variables, like i do for the campsite type in the home page. At first i thought that it should use CSS variables, mostly for coherence: if another section of the web does it for its background image, why no this one. The difference is that the home page is dynamically created from the database, while this page is static and we know what icons we need, thus it makes more sense to move it to the stylesheet file, because then it will be downloaded by user agents that actually want to use it (e.g., browsers, but not Braille terminals).
2023-09-16 22:11:39 +00:00
msgid "There are many bicycle rental companies in Olot."
msgstr "A Olot podéis encontrar empresas de alquiler de bicicletas."
Add user-defined order to campsite types, options, seasons and carousels I use Sortable, exactly like HTMx’s sorting example does[0]. Had to export the slug or ID of some entries to be able to add it in the hidden input. For forms that use ID instead of slug, had to use an input name other than “id” because otherwise the swap would fail due to bug #1496[1]. It is apparently fixed in a recent version of HTMx, but i did not want to update for fear of behaviour changes. [0]: https://htmx.org/examples/sortable/ [1]: https://github.com/bigskysoftware/htmx/issues/1496
2023-12-20 18:52:14 +00:00
#: web/templates/public/surroundings.gohtml:62
Add the surroundings static page This page is “highly stylized”, with a masonry-like grid, that i did not know how to generate automatically from data defined in PostgreSQL, therefore with Oriol we agreed to have this one as a static page and we will see what we can do if the customer asks to be able to change it. I was a bit undecided on whether the icons in the bottom part of the page should be defined in the CSS or with style="" and CSS variables, like i do for the campsite type in the home page. At first i thought that it should use CSS variables, mostly for coherence: if another section of the web does it for its background image, why no this one. The difference is that the home page is dynamically created from the database, while this page is static and we know what icons we need, thus it makes more sense to move it to the stylesheet file, because then it will be downloaded by user agents that actually want to use it (e.g., browsers, but not Braille terminals).
2023-09-16 22:11:39 +00:00
msgid "Routes"
msgstr "Rutas"
Add user-defined order to campsite types, options, seasons and carousels I use Sortable, exactly like HTMx’s sorting example does[0]. Had to export the slug or ID of some entries to be able to add it in the hidden input. For forms that use ID instead of slug, had to use an input name other than “id” because otherwise the swap would fail due to bug #1496[1]. It is apparently fixed in a recent version of HTMx, but i did not want to update for fear of behaviour changes. [0]: https://htmx.org/examples/sortable/ [1]: https://github.com/bigskysoftware/htmx/issues/1496
2023-12-20 18:52:14 +00:00
#: web/templates/public/surroundings.gohtml:63
Add the surroundings static page This page is “highly stylized”, with a masonry-like grid, that i did not know how to generate automatically from data defined in PostgreSQL, therefore with Oriol we agreed to have this one as a static page and we will see what we can do if the customer asks to be able to change it. I was a bit undecided on whether the icons in the bottom part of the page should be defined in the CSS or with style="" and CSS variables, like i do for the campsite type in the home page. At first i thought that it should use CSS variables, mostly for coherence: if another section of the web does it for its background image, why no this one. The difference is that the home page is dynamically created from the database, while this page is static and we know what icons we need, thus it makes more sense to move it to the stylesheet file, because then it will be downloaded by user agents that actually want to use it (e.g., browsers, but not Braille terminals).
2023-09-16 22:11:39 +00:00
msgid "Routes of all kinds, climbing, mountain passes, for all levels."
msgstr "Rutas de todo tipo, escalada, puertos de montaña, para todos los niveles."
Add user-defined order to campsite types, options, seasons and carousels I use Sortable, exactly like HTMx’s sorting example does[0]. Had to export the slug or ID of some entries to be able to add it in the hidden input. For forms that use ID instead of slug, had to use an input name other than “id” because otherwise the swap would fail due to bug #1496[1]. It is apparently fixed in a recent version of HTMx, but i did not want to update for fear of behaviour changes. [0]: https://htmx.org/examples/sortable/ [1]: https://github.com/bigskysoftware/htmx/issues/1496
2023-12-20 18:52:14 +00:00
#: web/templates/public/surroundings.gohtml:67
Add the surroundings static page This page is “highly stylized”, with a masonry-like grid, that i did not know how to generate automatically from data defined in PostgreSQL, therefore with Oriol we agreed to have this one as a static page and we will see what we can do if the customer asks to be able to change it. I was a bit undecided on whether the icons in the bottom part of the page should be defined in the CSS or with style="" and CSS variables, like i do for the campsite type in the home page. At first i thought that it should use CSS variables, mostly for coherence: if another section of the web does it for its background image, why no this one. The difference is that the home page is dynamically created from the database, while this page is static and we know what icons we need, thus it makes more sense to move it to the stylesheet file, because then it will be downloaded by user agents that actually want to use it (e.g., browsers, but not Braille terminals).
2023-09-16 22:11:39 +00:00
msgid "Family outing"
msgstr "Excusiones familiares"
Add user-defined order to campsite types, options, seasons and carousels I use Sortable, exactly like HTMx’s sorting example does[0]. Had to export the slug or ID of some entries to be able to add it in the hidden input. For forms that use ID instead of slug, had to use an input name other than “id” because otherwise the swap would fail due to bug #1496[1]. It is apparently fixed in a recent version of HTMx, but i did not want to update for fear of behaviour changes. [0]: https://htmx.org/examples/sortable/ [1]: https://github.com/bigskysoftware/htmx/issues/1496
2023-12-20 18:52:14 +00:00
#: web/templates/public/surroundings.gohtml:68
Add the surroundings static page This page is “highly stylized”, with a masonry-like grid, that i did not know how to generate automatically from data defined in PostgreSQL, therefore with Oriol we agreed to have this one as a static page and we will see what we can do if the customer asks to be able to change it. I was a bit undecided on whether the icons in the bottom part of the page should be defined in the CSS or with style="" and CSS variables, like i do for the campsite type in the home page. At first i thought that it should use CSS variables, mostly for coherence: if another section of the web does it for its background image, why no this one. The difference is that the home page is dynamically created from the database, while this page is static and we know what icons we need, thus it makes more sense to move it to the stylesheet file, because then it will be downloaded by user agents that actually want to use it (e.g., browsers, but not Braille terminals).
2023-09-16 22:11:39 +00:00
msgid "Many outing possibilities, for all ages."
msgstr "Múltiples excursiones para todas las edades."
Add user-defined order to campsite types, options, seasons and carousels I use Sortable, exactly like HTMx’s sorting example does[0]. Had to export the slug or ID of some entries to be able to add it in the hidden input. For forms that use ID instead of slug, had to use an input name other than “id” because otherwise the swap would fail due to bug #1496[1]. It is apparently fixed in a recent version of HTMx, but i did not want to update for fear of behaviour changes. [0]: https://htmx.org/examples/sortable/ [1]: https://github.com/bigskysoftware/htmx/issues/1496
2023-12-20 18:52:14 +00:00
#: web/templates/public/surroundings.gohtml:72
Add the surroundings static page This page is “highly stylized”, with a masonry-like grid, that i did not know how to generate automatically from data defined in PostgreSQL, therefore with Oriol we agreed to have this one as a static page and we will see what we can do if the customer asks to be able to change it. I was a bit undecided on whether the icons in the bottom part of the page should be defined in the CSS or with style="" and CSS variables, like i do for the campsite type in the home page. At first i thought that it should use CSS variables, mostly for coherence: if another section of the web does it for its background image, why no this one. The difference is that the home page is dynamically created from the database, while this page is static and we know what icons we need, thus it makes more sense to move it to the stylesheet file, because then it will be downloaded by user agents that actually want to use it (e.g., browsers, but not Braille terminals).
2023-09-16 22:11:39 +00:00
msgid "Kayak"
msgstr "Kayak"
Add user-defined order to campsite types, options, seasons and carousels I use Sortable, exactly like HTMx’s sorting example does[0]. Had to export the slug or ID of some entries to be able to add it in the hidden input. For forms that use ID instead of slug, had to use an input name other than “id” because otherwise the swap would fail due to bug #1496[1]. It is apparently fixed in a recent version of HTMx, but i did not want to update for fear of behaviour changes. [0]: https://htmx.org/examples/sortable/ [1]: https://github.com/bigskysoftware/htmx/issues/1496
2023-12-20 18:52:14 +00:00
#: web/templates/public/surroundings.gohtml:73
Add the surroundings static page This page is “highly stylized”, with a masonry-like grid, that i did not know how to generate automatically from data defined in PostgreSQL, therefore with Oriol we agreed to have this one as a static page and we will see what we can do if the customer asks to be able to change it. I was a bit undecided on whether the icons in the bottom part of the page should be defined in the CSS or with style="" and CSS variables, like i do for the campsite type in the home page. At first i thought that it should use CSS variables, mostly for coherence: if another section of the web does it for its background image, why no this one. The difference is that the home page is dynamically created from the database, while this page is static and we know what icons we need, thus it makes more sense to move it to the stylesheet file, because then it will be downloaded by user agents that actually want to use it (e.g., browsers, but not Braille terminals).
2023-09-16 22:11:39 +00:00
msgid "There are several points where you can go by kayak, from sections of the Ter river as well as on the coast…."
msgstr "Hay diversos puntos dónde podéis ir en kayak, desde tramos del río Ter como también en la costa…."
Add the campground page For now, this page only shows the map, that i had to create a new “files” template function to include it as an extra template file.
2023-10-06 20:14:11 +00:00
#: web/templates/public/campground.gohtml:6
#: web/templates/public/campground.gohtml:11
Add management of legal texts
2023-12-22 01:23:18 +00:00
#: web/templates/public/layout.gohtml:53 web/templates/public/layout.gohtml:93
Add the campground page For now, this page only shows the map, that i had to create a new “files” template function to include it as an extra template file.
2023-10-06 20:14:11 +00:00
msgctxt "title"
msgid "Campground"
msgstr "El camping"
Add the first draft of the booking and payment forms The form is based on the one in the current website, but in a single page instead of split into many pages; possibly each <fieldset> should be in a separate page/view. The idea is for Oriol to check the design and decide how it would be presented to the user, so i needed something to show him first. I hardcoded the **test** data for the customer’s Redsys account. Is this bad? I hope not, but i am not really, really sure. The data sent to Redsys is just a placeholder because there are booking details that i do not know, like what i have to do with the “teenagers” field or the area preferences, thus i can not yet have a booking relation. Nevertheless, had to generate a random order number up to 12-chars in length or Redsys would refuse the payment, claiming that the order is duplicated. The Redsys package is based on the PHP code provided by Redsys themselves, plus some hints at the implementations from various Go packages that did not know why they were so complicated. Had to grant select on table country to guest in order to show the select with the country options. I have changed the “Postal code” input in taxDetails for “Postcode” because this is the spell that it is used in the current web, i did not see a reason to change it—it is an accepted form—, and i did not want to have inconsistencies between forms.
2023-10-19 19:37:34 +00:00
#: web/templates/public/booking.gohtml:6 web/templates/public/booking.gohtml:11
Add management of legal texts
2023-12-22 01:23:18 +00:00
#: web/templates/public/layout.gohtml:69
Add the first draft of the booking and payment forms The form is based on the one in the current website, but in a single page instead of split into many pages; possibly each <fieldset> should be in a separate page/view. The idea is for Oriol to check the design and decide how it would be presented to the user, so i needed something to show him first. I hardcoded the **test** data for the customer’s Redsys account. Is this bad? I hope not, but i am not really, really sure. The data sent to Redsys is just a placeholder because there are booking details that i do not know, like what i have to do with the “teenagers” field or the area preferences, thus i can not yet have a booking relation. Nevertheless, had to generate a random order number up to 12-chars in length or Redsys would refuse the payment, claiming that the order is duplicated. The Redsys package is based on the PHP code provided by Redsys themselves, plus some hints at the implementations from various Go packages that did not know why they were so complicated. Had to grant select on table country to guest in order to show the select with the country options. I have changed the “Postal code” input in taxDetails for “Postcode” because this is the spell that it is used in the current web, i did not see a reason to change it—it is an accepted form—, and i did not want to have inconsistencies between forms.
2023-10-19 19:37:34 +00:00
msgctxt "title"
msgid "Booking"
msgstr "Reserva"
#: web/templates/public/booking.gohtml:15
msgctxt "title"
msgid "Customer Details"
msgstr "Detalles del cliente"
#: web/templates/public/booking.gohtml:18
msgctxt "input"
msgid "Full name"
msgstr "Nombre y apellidos"
Add the payment form to admin Had to change setup_redsys because admins can not read the current encrypt key, thus it is not possible to `set encrypt_key = coalesce(…, encrypt_key)`. Not that it did much sense, anyway, as i was already inside the branch of the if when encrpty_key is null. However, it seems that this also affects in the `on conflict` update. I assume this is because `excluded` is some kind of row of the relation and has the same restrictions.
2023-10-27 14:04:43 +00:00
#: web/templates/public/booking.gohtml:27
Add the first draft of the booking and payment forms The form is based on the one in the current website, but in a single page instead of split into many pages; possibly each <fieldset> should be in a separate page/view. The idea is for Oriol to check the design and decide how it would be presented to the user, so i needed something to show him first. I hardcoded the **test** data for the customer’s Redsys account. Is this bad? I hope not, but i am not really, really sure. The data sent to Redsys is just a placeholder because there are booking details that i do not know, like what i have to do with the “teenagers” field or the area preferences, thus i can not yet have a booking relation. Nevertheless, had to generate a random order number up to 12-chars in length or Redsys would refuse the payment, claiming that the order is duplicated. The Redsys package is based on the PHP code provided by Redsys themselves, plus some hints at the implementations from various Go packages that did not know why they were so complicated. Had to grant select on table country to guest in order to show the select with the country options. I have changed the “Postal code” input in taxDetails for “Postcode” because this is the spell that it is used in the current web, i did not see a reason to change it—it is an accepted form—, and i did not want to have inconsistencies between forms.
2023-10-19 19:37:34 +00:00
msgctxt "input"
msgid "Address (optional)"
msgstr "Dirección (opcional)"
Add the payment form to admin Had to change setup_redsys because admins can not read the current encrypt key, thus it is not possible to `set encrypt_key = coalesce(…, encrypt_key)`. Not that it did much sense, anyway, as i was already inside the branch of the if when encrpty_key is null. However, it seems that this also affects in the `on conflict` update. I assume this is because `excluded` is some kind of row of the relation and has the same restrictions.
2023-10-27 14:04:43 +00:00
#: web/templates/public/booking.gohtml:36
Add the first draft of the booking and payment forms The form is based on the one in the current website, but in a single page instead of split into many pages; possibly each <fieldset> should be in a separate page/view. The idea is for Oriol to check the design and decide how it would be presented to the user, so i needed something to show him first. I hardcoded the **test** data for the customer’s Redsys account. Is this bad? I hope not, but i am not really, really sure. The data sent to Redsys is just a placeholder because there are booking details that i do not know, like what i have to do with the “teenagers” field or the area preferences, thus i can not yet have a booking relation. Nevertheless, had to generate a random order number up to 12-chars in length or Redsys would refuse the payment, claiming that the order is duplicated. The Redsys package is based on the PHP code provided by Redsys themselves, plus some hints at the implementations from various Go packages that did not know why they were so complicated. Had to grant select on table country to guest in order to show the select with the country options. I have changed the “Postal code” input in taxDetails for “Postcode” because this is the spell that it is used in the current web, i did not see a reason to change it—it is an accepted form—, and i did not want to have inconsistencies between forms.
2023-10-19 19:37:34 +00:00
msgctxt "input"
msgid "Postcode (optional)"
msgstr "Código postal (opcional)"
Add the payment form to admin Had to change setup_redsys because admins can not read the current encrypt key, thus it is not possible to `set encrypt_key = coalesce(…, encrypt_key)`. Not that it did much sense, anyway, as i was already inside the branch of the if when encrpty_key is null. However, it seems that this also affects in the `on conflict` update. I assume this is because `excluded` is some kind of row of the relation and has the same restrictions.
2023-10-27 14:04:43 +00:00
#: web/templates/public/booking.gohtml:45
Add the first draft of the booking and payment forms The form is based on the one in the current website, but in a single page instead of split into many pages; possibly each <fieldset> should be in a separate page/view. The idea is for Oriol to check the design and decide how it would be presented to the user, so i needed something to show him first. I hardcoded the **test** data for the customer’s Redsys account. Is this bad? I hope not, but i am not really, really sure. The data sent to Redsys is just a placeholder because there are booking details that i do not know, like what i have to do with the “teenagers” field or the area preferences, thus i can not yet have a booking relation. Nevertheless, had to generate a random order number up to 12-chars in length or Redsys would refuse the payment, claiming that the order is duplicated. The Redsys package is based on the PHP code provided by Redsys themselves, plus some hints at the implementations from various Go packages that did not know why they were so complicated. Had to grant select on table country to guest in order to show the select with the country options. I have changed the “Postal code” input in taxDetails for “Postcode” because this is the spell that it is used in the current web, i did not see a reason to change it—it is an accepted form—, and i did not want to have inconsistencies between forms.
2023-10-19 19:37:34 +00:00
msgctxt "input"
msgid "Town or village (optional)"
msgstr "Población (opcional)"
Add the payment form to admin Had to change setup_redsys because admins can not read the current encrypt key, thus it is not possible to `set encrypt_key = coalesce(…, encrypt_key)`. Not that it did much sense, anyway, as i was already inside the branch of the if when encrpty_key is null. However, it seems that this also affects in the `on conflict` update. I assume this is because `excluded` is some kind of row of the relation and has the same restrictions.
2023-10-27 14:04:43 +00:00
#: web/templates/public/booking.gohtml:54
Add the first draft of the booking and payment forms The form is based on the one in the current website, but in a single page instead of split into many pages; possibly each <fieldset> should be in a separate page/view. The idea is for Oriol to check the design and decide how it would be presented to the user, so i needed something to show him first. I hardcoded the **test** data for the customer’s Redsys account. Is this bad? I hope not, but i am not really, really sure. The data sent to Redsys is just a placeholder because there are booking details that i do not know, like what i have to do with the “teenagers” field or the area preferences, thus i can not yet have a booking relation. Nevertheless, had to generate a random order number up to 12-chars in length or Redsys would refuse the payment, claiming that the order is duplicated. The Redsys package is based on the PHP code provided by Redsys themselves, plus some hints at the implementations from various Go packages that did not know why they were so complicated. Had to grant select on table country to guest in order to show the select with the country options. I have changed the “Postal code” input in taxDetails for “Postcode” because this is the spell that it is used in the current web, i did not see a reason to change it—it is an accepted form—, and i did not want to have inconsistencies between forms.
2023-10-19 19:37:34 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/taxDetails.gohtml:98
msgctxt "input"
msgid "Country"
msgstr "País"
Add the payment form to admin Had to change setup_redsys because admins can not read the current encrypt key, thus it is not possible to `set encrypt_key = coalesce(…, encrypt_key)`. Not that it did much sense, anyway, as i was already inside the branch of the if when encrpty_key is null. However, it seems that this also affects in the `on conflict` update. I assume this is because `excluded` is some kind of row of the relation and has the same restrictions.
2023-10-27 14:04:43 +00:00
#: web/templates/public/booking.gohtml:57
Add the first draft of the booking and payment forms The form is based on the one in the current website, but in a single page instead of split into many pages; possibly each <fieldset> should be in a separate page/view. The idea is for Oriol to check the design and decide how it would be presented to the user, so i needed something to show him first. I hardcoded the **test** data for the customer’s Redsys account. Is this bad? I hope not, but i am not really, really sure. The data sent to Redsys is just a placeholder because there are booking details that i do not know, like what i have to do with the “teenagers” field or the area preferences, thus i can not yet have a booking relation. Nevertheless, had to generate a random order number up to 12-chars in length or Redsys would refuse the payment, claiming that the order is duplicated. The Redsys package is based on the PHP code provided by Redsys themselves, plus some hints at the implementations from various Go packages that did not know why they were so complicated. Had to grant select on table country to guest in order to show the select with the country options. I have changed the “Postal code” input in taxDetails for “Postcode” because this is the spell that it is used in the current web, i did not see a reason to change it—it is an accepted form—, and i did not want to have inconsistencies between forms.
2023-10-19 19:37:34 +00:00
msgid "Choose a country"
msgstr "Escoja un país"
Add the payment form to admin Had to change setup_redsys because admins can not read the current encrypt key, thus it is not possible to `set encrypt_key = coalesce(…, encrypt_key)`. Not that it did much sense, anyway, as i was already inside the branch of the if when encrpty_key is null. However, it seems that this also affects in the `on conflict` update. I assume this is because `excluded` is some kind of row of the relation and has the same restrictions.
2023-10-27 14:04:43 +00:00
#: web/templates/public/booking.gohtml:65 web/templates/admin/login.gohtml:22
Add the first draft of the booking and payment forms The form is based on the one in the current website, but in a single page instead of split into many pages; possibly each <fieldset> should be in a separate page/view. The idea is for Oriol to check the design and decide how it would be presented to the user, so i needed something to show him first. I hardcoded the **test** data for the customer’s Redsys account. Is this bad? I hope not, but i am not really, really sure. The data sent to Redsys is just a placeholder because there are booking details that i do not know, like what i have to do with the “teenagers” field or the area preferences, thus i can not yet have a booking relation. Nevertheless, had to generate a random order number up to 12-chars in length or Redsys would refuse the payment, claiming that the order is duplicated. The Redsys package is based on the PHP code provided by Redsys themselves, plus some hints at the implementations from various Go packages that did not know why they were so complicated. Had to grant select on table country to guest in order to show the select with the country options. I have changed the “Postal code” input in taxDetails for “Postcode” because this is the spell that it is used in the current web, i did not see a reason to change it—it is an accepted form—, and i did not want to have inconsistencies between forms.
2023-10-19 19:37:34 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/profile.gohtml:35
#: web/templates/admin/taxDetails.gohtml:50
msgctxt "input"
msgid "Email"
msgstr "Correo-e"
Add the payment form to admin Had to change setup_redsys because admins can not read the current encrypt key, thus it is not possible to `set encrypt_key = coalesce(…, encrypt_key)`. Not that it did much sense, anyway, as i was already inside the branch of the if when encrpty_key is null. However, it seems that this also affects in the `on conflict` update. I assume this is because `excluded` is some kind of row of the relation and has the same restrictions.
2023-10-27 14:04:43 +00:00
#: web/templates/public/booking.gohtml:74
Add the first draft of the booking and payment forms The form is based on the one in the current website, but in a single page instead of split into many pages; possibly each <fieldset> should be in a separate page/view. The idea is for Oriol to check the design and decide how it would be presented to the user, so i needed something to show him first. I hardcoded the **test** data for the customer’s Redsys account. Is this bad? I hope not, but i am not really, really sure. The data sent to Redsys is just a placeholder because there are booking details that i do not know, like what i have to do with the “teenagers” field or the area preferences, thus i can not yet have a booking relation. Nevertheless, had to generate a random order number up to 12-chars in length or Redsys would refuse the payment, claiming that the order is duplicated. The Redsys package is based on the PHP code provided by Redsys themselves, plus some hints at the implementations from various Go packages that did not know why they were so complicated. Had to grant select on table country to guest in order to show the select with the country options. I have changed the “Postal code” input in taxDetails for “Postcode” because this is the spell that it is used in the current web, i did not see a reason to change it—it is an accepted form—, and i did not want to have inconsistencies between forms.
2023-10-19 19:37:34 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/taxDetails.gohtml:42
msgctxt "input"
msgid "Phone"
msgstr "Teléfono"
Add the payment form to admin Had to change setup_redsys because admins can not read the current encrypt key, thus it is not possible to `set encrypt_key = coalesce(…, encrypt_key)`. Not that it did much sense, anyway, as i was already inside the branch of the if when encrpty_key is null. However, it seems that this also affects in the `on conflict` update. I assume this is because `excluded` is some kind of row of the relation and has the same restrictions.
2023-10-27 14:04:43 +00:00
#: web/templates/public/booking.gohtml:83
Add the first draft of the booking and payment forms The form is based on the one in the current website, but in a single page instead of split into many pages; possibly each <fieldset> should be in a separate page/view. The idea is for Oriol to check the design and decide how it would be presented to the user, so i needed something to show him first. I hardcoded the **test** data for the customer’s Redsys account. Is this bad? I hope not, but i am not really, really sure. The data sent to Redsys is just a placeholder because there are booking details that i do not know, like what i have to do with the “teenagers” field or the area preferences, thus i can not yet have a booking relation. Nevertheless, had to generate a random order number up to 12-chars in length or Redsys would refuse the payment, claiming that the order is duplicated. The Redsys package is based on the PHP code provided by Redsys themselves, plus some hints at the implementations from various Go packages that did not know why they were so complicated. Had to grant select on table country to guest in order to show the select with the country options. I have changed the “Postal code” input in taxDetails for “Postcode” because this is the spell that it is used in the current web, i did not see a reason to change it—it is an accepted form—, and i did not want to have inconsistencies between forms.
2023-10-19 19:37:34 +00:00
msgctxt "title"
Fix typo in Accommodation, and fix its translations
2023-12-13 22:45:29 +00:00
msgid "Accommodation"
msgstr "Alojamientos"
Add the first draft of the booking and payment forms The form is based on the one in the current website, but in a single page instead of split into many pages; possibly each <fieldset> should be in a separate page/view. The idea is for Oriol to check the design and decide how it would be presented to the user, so i needed something to show him first. I hardcoded the **test** data for the customer’s Redsys account. Is this bad? I hope not, but i am not really, really sure. The data sent to Redsys is just a placeholder because there are booking details that i do not know, like what i have to do with the “teenagers” field or the area preferences, thus i can not yet have a booking relation. Nevertheless, had to generate a random order number up to 12-chars in length or Redsys would refuse the payment, claiming that the order is duplicated. The Redsys package is based on the PHP code provided by Redsys themselves, plus some hints at the implementations from various Go packages that did not know why they were so complicated. Had to grant select on table country to guest in order to show the select with the country options. I have changed the “Postal code” input in taxDetails for “Postcode” because this is the spell that it is used in the current web, i did not see a reason to change it—it is an accepted form—, and i did not want to have inconsistencies between forms.
2023-10-19 19:37:34 +00:00
Remove “Party Details” from booking form, and stylize it a bit
2023-12-12 22:16:04 +00:00
#: web/templates/public/booking.gohtml:98
msgctxt "input"
msgid "Area preferences (optional)"
msgstr "Preferencias de área (opcional)"
#: web/templates/public/booking.gohtml:120
Add the first draft of the booking and payment forms The form is based on the one in the current website, but in a single page instead of split into many pages; possibly each <fieldset> should be in a separate page/view. The idea is for Oriol to check the design and decide how it would be presented to the user, so i needed something to show him first. I hardcoded the **test** data for the customer’s Redsys account. Is this bad? I hope not, but i am not really, really sure. The data sent to Redsys is just a placeholder because there are booking details that i do not know, like what i have to do with the “teenagers” field or the area preferences, thus i can not yet have a booking relation. Nevertheless, had to generate a random order number up to 12-chars in length or Redsys would refuse the payment, claiming that the order is duplicated. The Redsys package is based on the PHP code provided by Redsys themselves, plus some hints at the implementations from various Go packages that did not know why they were so complicated. Had to grant select on table country to guest in order to show the select with the country options. I have changed the “Postal code” input in taxDetails for “Postcode” because this is the spell that it is used in the current web, i did not see a reason to change it—it is an accepted form—, and i did not want to have inconsistencies between forms.
2023-10-19 19:37:34 +00:00
msgctxt "title"
msgid "Booking Period"
msgstr "Periodo de reserva"
Remove “Party Details” from booking form, and stylize it a bit
2023-12-12 22:16:04 +00:00
#: web/templates/public/booking.gohtml:123
Add the first draft of the booking and payment forms The form is based on the one in the current website, but in a single page instead of split into many pages; possibly each <fieldset> should be in a separate page/view. The idea is for Oriol to check the design and decide how it would be presented to the user, so i needed something to show him first. I hardcoded the **test** data for the customer’s Redsys account. Is this bad? I hope not, but i am not really, really sure. The data sent to Redsys is just a placeholder because there are booking details that i do not know, like what i have to do with the “teenagers” field or the area preferences, thus i can not yet have a booking relation. Nevertheless, had to generate a random order number up to 12-chars in length or Redsys would refuse the payment, claiming that the order is duplicated. The Redsys package is based on the PHP code provided by Redsys themselves, plus some hints at the implementations from various Go packages that did not know why they were so complicated. Had to grant select on table country to guest in order to show the select with the country options. I have changed the “Postal code” input in taxDetails for “Postcode” because this is the spell that it is used in the current web, i did not see a reason to change it—it is an accepted form—, and i did not want to have inconsistencies between forms.
2023-10-19 19:37:34 +00:00
msgctxt "input"
msgid "Arrival date"
msgstr "Fecha de llegada"
Remove “Party Details” from booking form, and stylize it a bit
2023-12-12 22:16:04 +00:00
#: web/templates/public/booking.gohtml:132
Add the first draft of the booking and payment forms The form is based on the one in the current website, but in a single page instead of split into many pages; possibly each <fieldset> should be in a separate page/view. The idea is for Oriol to check the design and decide how it would be presented to the user, so i needed something to show him first. I hardcoded the **test** data for the customer’s Redsys account. Is this bad? I hope not, but i am not really, really sure. The data sent to Redsys is just a placeholder because there are booking details that i do not know, like what i have to do with the “teenagers” field or the area preferences, thus i can not yet have a booking relation. Nevertheless, had to generate a random order number up to 12-chars in length or Redsys would refuse the payment, claiming that the order is duplicated. The Redsys package is based on the PHP code provided by Redsys themselves, plus some hints at the implementations from various Go packages that did not know why they were so complicated. Had to grant select on table country to guest in order to show the select with the country options. I have changed the “Postal code” input in taxDetails for “Postcode” because this is the spell that it is used in the current web, i did not see a reason to change it—it is an accepted form—, and i did not want to have inconsistencies between forms.
2023-10-19 19:37:34 +00:00
msgctxt "input"
msgid "Departure date"
msgstr "Fecha de salida"
Remove “Party Details” from booking form, and stylize it a bit
2023-12-12 22:16:04 +00:00
#: web/templates/public/booking.gohtml:143
Add the first draft of the booking and payment forms The form is based on the one in the current website, but in a single page instead of split into many pages; possibly each <fieldset> should be in a separate page/view. The idea is for Oriol to check the design and decide how it would be presented to the user, so i needed something to show him first. I hardcoded the **test** data for the customer’s Redsys account. Is this bad? I hope not, but i am not really, really sure. The data sent to Redsys is just a placeholder because there are booking details that i do not know, like what i have to do with the “teenagers” field or the area preferences, thus i can not yet have a booking relation. Nevertheless, had to generate a random order number up to 12-chars in length or Redsys would refuse the payment, claiming that the order is duplicated. The Redsys package is based on the PHP code provided by Redsys themselves, plus some hints at the implementations from various Go packages that did not know why they were so complicated. Had to grant select on table country to guest in order to show the select with the country options. I have changed the “Postal code” input in taxDetails for “Postcode” because this is the spell that it is used in the current web, i did not see a reason to change it—it is an accepted form—, and i did not want to have inconsistencies between forms.
2023-10-19 19:37:34 +00:00
msgctxt "input"
msgid "ACSI card? (optional)"
msgstr "¿Tarjeta ACSI? (opcional)"
Remove “Party Details” from booking form, and stylize it a bit
2023-12-12 22:16:04 +00:00
#: web/templates/public/booking.gohtml:150
Add the first draft of the booking and payment forms The form is based on the one in the current website, but in a single page instead of split into many pages; possibly each <fieldset> should be in a separate page/view. The idea is for Oriol to check the design and decide how it would be presented to the user, so i needed something to show him first. I hardcoded the **test** data for the customer’s Redsys account. Is this bad? I hope not, but i am not really, really sure. The data sent to Redsys is just a placeholder because there are booking details that i do not know, like what i have to do with the “teenagers” field or the area preferences, thus i can not yet have a booking relation. Nevertheless, had to generate a random order number up to 12-chars in length or Redsys would refuse the payment, claiming that the order is duplicated. The Redsys package is based on the PHP code provided by Redsys themselves, plus some hints at the implementations from various Go packages that did not know why they were so complicated. Had to grant select on table country to guest in order to show the select with the country options. I have changed the “Postal code” input in taxDetails for “Postcode” because this is the spell that it is used in the current web, i did not see a reason to change it—it is an accepted form—, and i did not want to have inconsistencies between forms.
2023-10-19 19:37:34 +00:00
msgctxt "input"
Updated translations
2023-12-22 02:32:40 +00:00
msgid "I have read and I accept <a href=\"%s\" target=\"_blank\">the reservation conditions</a>"
msgstr "He leído y acepto <a href=\"%s\" target=\"_blank\">las condiciones de reserva</a>"
Add the first draft of the booking and payment forms The form is based on the one in the current website, but in a single page instead of split into many pages; possibly each <fieldset> should be in a separate page/view. The idea is for Oriol to check the design and decide how it would be presented to the user, so i needed something to show him first. I hardcoded the **test** data for the customer’s Redsys account. Is this bad? I hope not, but i am not really, really sure. The data sent to Redsys is just a placeholder because there are booking details that i do not know, like what i have to do with the “teenagers” field or the area preferences, thus i can not yet have a booking relation. Nevertheless, had to generate a random order number up to 12-chars in length or Redsys would refuse the payment, claiming that the order is duplicated. The Redsys package is based on the PHP code provided by Redsys themselves, plus some hints at the implementations from various Go packages that did not know why they were so complicated. Had to grant select on table country to guest in order to show the select with the country options. I have changed the “Postal code” input in taxDetails for “Postcode” because this is the spell that it is used in the current web, i did not see a reason to change it—it is an accepted form—, and i did not want to have inconsistencies between forms.
2023-10-19 19:37:34 +00:00
Add management of legal texts
2023-12-22 01:23:18 +00:00
#: web/templates/public/layout.gohtml:11 web/templates/public/layout.gohtml:47
#: web/templates/public/layout.gohtml:130
Split templates and handlers into admin and public I need to check that the user is an employee (or admin) in administration handlers, but i do not want to do it for each handler, because i am bound to forget it. Thus, i added the /admin sub-path for these resources. The public-facing web is the rest of the resources outside /admin, but for now there is only home, to test whether it works as expected or not. The public-facing web can not relay on the user’s language settings, as the guest user has no way to set that. I would be happy to just use the Accept-Language header for that, but apparently Google does not use that header[0], and they give four alternatives: a country-specific domain, a subdomain with a generic top-level domain (gTLD), subdirectories with a gTLD, or URL parameters (e.g., site.com?loc=de). Of the four, Google does not recommend URL parameters, and the customer is already using subdirectories with the current site, therefor that’s what i have chosen. Google also tells me that it is a very good idea to have links between localized version of the same resources, either with <link> elements, Link HTTP response headers, or a sitemap file[1]; they are all equivalent in the eyes of Google. I have choosen the Link response headers way, because for that i can simply “augment” ResponseHeader to automatically add these headers when the response status is 2xx, otherwise i would need to pass down the original URL path until it reaches the template. Even though Camper is supposed to be a “generic”, multi-company application, i think i will stick to the easiest route and write the templates for just the “first” customer. [0]: https://developers.google.com/search/docs/specialty/international/managing-multi-regional-sites [1]: https://developers.google.com/search/docs/specialty/international/localized-versions
2023-08-05 01:42:37 +00:00
msgid "Campsite Montagut"
msgstr "Camping Montagut"
Replace contact page with location Customer does not want a contact page, but a page where they can write the direction on how to reach the campground, with a Google map embed instead of using Leaflet, because Google Maps shows the reviews right in the map. That means i had to replace the GPS locations with XML fields for the customer to write. In all four languages. This time i tried a translation approach inspired by PrestaShop: instead of opening a new page for each language, i have all languages in the same page and use AlpineJS to show just a single language. It is far easier to write the translations, even though you do not have the source text visible, specially in this section that there is no place for me to put the language links.
2023-12-21 20:17:04 +00:00
#: web/templates/public/layout.gohtml:23 web/templates/admin/layout.gohtml:20
Split templates and handlers into admin and public I need to check that the user is an employee (or admin) in administration handlers, but i do not want to do it for each handler, because i am bound to forget it. Thus, i added the /admin sub-path for these resources. The public-facing web is the rest of the resources outside /admin, but for now there is only home, to test whether it works as expected or not. The public-facing web can not relay on the user’s language settings, as the guest user has no way to set that. I would be happy to just use the Accept-Language header for that, but apparently Google does not use that header[0], and they give four alternatives: a country-specific domain, a subdomain with a generic top-level domain (gTLD), subdirectories with a gTLD, or URL parameters (e.g., site.com?loc=de). Of the four, Google does not recommend URL parameters, and the customer is already using subdirectories with the current site, therefor that’s what i have chosen. Google also tells me that it is a very good idea to have links between localized version of the same resources, either with <link> elements, Link HTTP response headers, or a sitemap file[1]; they are all equivalent in the eyes of Google. I have choosen the Link response headers way, because for that i can simply “augment” ResponseHeader to automatically add these headers when the response status is 2xx, otherwise i would need to pass down the original URL path until it reaches the template. Even though Camper is supposed to be a “generic”, multi-company application, i think i will stick to the easiest route and write the templates for just the “first” customer. [0]: https://developers.google.com/search/docs/specialty/international/managing-multi-regional-sites [1]: https://developers.google.com/search/docs/specialty/international/localized-versions
2023-08-05 01:42:37 +00:00
msgid "Skip to main content"
msgstr "Saltar al contenido principal"
Add “Menu” next to the trigram symbol (“hamburger”)
2024-01-10 18:41:57 +00:00
#: web/templates/public/layout.gohtml:49
msgid "Menu"
msgstr "Menú"
Add management of legal texts
2023-12-22 01:23:18 +00:00
#: web/templates/public/layout.gohtml:57 web/templates/public/layout.gohtml:103
Change “singular lodges” menu item to just “campsites”
2023-10-06 16:58:24 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/index.gohtml:6
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/index.gohtml:12
Add management of legal texts
2023-12-22 01:23:18 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/layout.gohtml:45 web/templates/admin/layout.gohtml:82
Change “singular lodges” menu item to just “campsites”
2023-10-06 16:58:24 +00:00
msgctxt "title"
msgid "Campsites"
msgstr "Alojamientos"
Add public page for campsite type, and function to edit them Had to export and move PublicPage struct to template because i can not import app from campsites/types: app already imports campsite for the http handler, and it, in turn, imports the types package for its own http handler; an import loop. Also had to replace PublicPage.MustRender with a Setup function because the page passed down to html/template was the PublicPage struct, not whatever struct embeds it. I was thinking more of Java inheritance here rather than struct embedding.
2023-08-08 00:29:14 +00:00
Add management of legal texts
2023-12-22 01:23:18 +00:00
#: web/templates/public/layout.gohtml:90
Add the footer site map I created a common template to show the company address in the footer and the contact page, and then i realized Go did not like to output my phone URL in the anchor without having the tel: schema in the template. I then removed that variable and now the URL is created with tel: and the phone number with its spaces removed.
2023-10-06 20:02:59 +00:00
msgctxt "title"
msgid "Sections"
msgstr "Apartados"
Add management of legal texts
2023-12-22 01:23:18 +00:00
#: web/templates/public/layout.gohtml:114
Replace contact page with location Customer does not want a contact page, but a page where they can write the direction on how to reach the campground, with a Google map embed instead of using Leaflet, because Google Maps shows the reviews right in the map. That means i had to replace the GPS locations with XML fields for the customer to write. In all four languages. This time i tried a translation approach inspired by PrestaShop: instead of opening a new page for each language, i have all languages in the same page and use AlpineJS to show just a single language. It is far easier to write the translations, even though you do not have the source text visible, specially in this section that there is no place for me to put the language links.
2023-12-21 20:17:04 +00:00
msgctxt "title"
msgid "Opening"
msgstr "Apertura"
Add management of legal texts
2023-12-22 01:23:18 +00:00
#: web/templates/public/layout.gohtml:121
Add the Catalonia’s Tourism Registry number to company It is required to be displayed on the website of tourism companies of Catalonia.
2023-10-14 19:59:36 +00:00
msgid "<abbr title=\"Catalonia Tourism Registry\">RTC</abbr> <abbr title=\"Number\">#</abbr>%s"
msgstr "<abbr title=\"Número\">Nº</abbr> <abbr title=\"Registro de Turismo de Cataluña\">RTC</abbr> %s"
Add management of legal texts
2023-12-22 01:23:18 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/legal/form.gohtml:8
#: web/templates/admin/legal/form.gohtml:25
Manage all media uploads in a single place It made no sense to have a file upload in each form that needs a media, because to reuse an existing media users would need to upload the exact same file again; this is very unusual and unfriendly. A better option is to have a “centralized” media section, where people can upload files there, and then have a picker to select from there. Ideally, there would be an upload option in the picker, but i did not add it yet. I’ve split the content from the media because i want users to have the option to update a media, for instance when they need to upload a reduced or cropped version of the same photo, without an edit they would need to upload the file as a new media and then update all places where the old version was used. And i did not want to trouble people that uploads the same photo twice: without the separate relation, doing so would throw a constraint error. I do not believe there is any security problem to have all companies link their media to the same file, as they were already readable by everyone and could upload the data from a different company to their own; in other words, it is not worse than it was now.
2023-09-20 23:56:44 +00:00
msgctxt "title"
Add management of legal texts
2023-12-22 01:23:18 +00:00
msgid "Edit Legal Text"
msgstr "Edición del texto legal"
Manage all media uploads in a single place It made no sense to have a file upload in each form that needs a media, because to reuse an existing media users would need to upload the exact same file again; this is very unusual and unfriendly. A better option is to have a “centralized” media section, where people can upload files there, and then have a picker to select from there. Ideally, there would be an upload option in the picker, but i did not add it yet. I’ve split the content from the media because i want users to have the option to update a media, for instance when they need to upload a reduced or cropped version of the same photo, without an edit they would need to upload the file as a new media and then update all places where the old version was used. And i did not want to trouble people that uploads the same photo twice: without the separate relation, doing so would throw a constraint error. I do not believe there is any security problem to have all companies link their media to the same file, as they were already readable by everyone and could upload the data from a different company to their own; in other words, it is not worse than it was now.
2023-09-20 23:56:44 +00:00
Add management of legal texts
2023-12-22 01:23:18 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/legal/form.gohtml:10
#: web/templates/admin/legal/form.gohtml:27
Manage all media uploads in a single place It made no sense to have a file upload in each form that needs a media, because to reuse an existing media users would need to upload the exact same file again; this is very unusual and unfriendly. A better option is to have a “centralized” media section, where people can upload files there, and then have a picker to select from there. Ideally, there would be an upload option in the picker, but i did not add it yet. I’ve split the content from the media because i want users to have the option to update a media, for instance when they need to upload a reduced or cropped version of the same photo, without an edit they would need to upload the file as a new media and then update all places where the old version was used. And i did not want to trouble people that uploads the same photo twice: without the separate relation, doing so would throw a constraint error. I do not believe there is any security problem to have all companies link their media to the same file, as they were already readable by everyone and could upload the data from a different company to their own; in other words, it is not worse than it was now.
2023-09-20 23:56:44 +00:00
msgctxt "title"
Add management of legal texts
2023-12-22 01:23:18 +00:00
msgid "New Legal Text"
msgstr "Nuevo texto legal"
Manage all media uploads in a single place It made no sense to have a file upload in each form that needs a media, because to reuse an existing media users would need to upload the exact same file again; this is very unusual and unfriendly. A better option is to have a “centralized” media section, where people can upload files there, and then have a picker to select from there. Ideally, there would be an upload option in the picker, but i did not add it yet. I’ve split the content from the media because i want users to have the option to update a media, for instance when they need to upload a reduced or cropped version of the same photo, without an edit they would need to upload the file as a new media and then update all places where the old version was used. And i did not want to trouble people that uploads the same photo twice: without the separate relation, doing so would throw a constraint error. I do not believe there is any security problem to have all companies link their media to the same file, as they were already readable by everyone and could upload the data from a different company to their own; in other words, it is not worse than it was now.
2023-09-20 23:56:44 +00:00
Add management of legal texts
2023-12-22 01:23:18 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/legal/form.gohtml:37
Manage all media uploads in a single place It made no sense to have a file upload in each form that needs a media, because to reuse an existing media users would need to upload the exact same file again; this is very unusual and unfriendly. A better option is to have a “centralized” media section, where people can upload files there, and then have a picker to select from there. Ideally, there would be an upload option in the picker, but i did not add it yet. I’ve split the content from the media because i want users to have the option to update a media, for instance when they need to upload a reduced or cropped version of the same photo, without an edit they would need to upload the file as a new media and then update all places where the old version was used. And i did not want to trouble people that uploads the same photo twice: without the separate relation, doing so would throw a constraint error. I do not believe there is any security problem to have all companies link their media to the same file, as they were already readable by everyone and could upload the data from a different company to their own; in other words, it is not worse than it was now.
2023-09-20 23:56:44 +00:00
msgctxt "input"
Add management of legal texts
2023-12-22 01:23:18 +00:00
msgid "Slug"
msgstr "Álias"
#: web/templates/admin/legal/form.gohtml:46
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/feature/form.gohtml:52
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/option/form.gohtml:34
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/type/form.gohtml:46
#: web/templates/admin/season/form.gohtml:46
#: web/templates/admin/season/l10n.gohtml:20
#: web/templates/admin/services/form.gohtml:52
#: web/templates/admin/services/l10n.gohtml:20
#: web/templates/admin/profile.gohtml:26
msgctxt "input"
msgid "Name"
msgstr "Nombre"
Manage all media uploads in a single place It made no sense to have a file upload in each form that needs a media, because to reuse an existing media users would need to upload the exact same file again; this is very unusual and unfriendly. A better option is to have a “centralized” media section, where people can upload files there, and then have a picker to select from there. Ideally, there would be an upload option in the picker, but i did not add it yet. I’ve split the content from the media because i want users to have the option to update a media, for instance when they need to upload a reduced or cropped version of the same photo, without an edit they would need to upload the file as a new media and then update all places where the old version was used. And i did not want to trouble people that uploads the same photo twice: without the separate relation, doing so would throw a constraint error. I do not believe there is any security problem to have all companies link their media to the same file, as they were already readable by everyone and could upload the data from a different company to their own; in other words, it is not worse than it was now.
2023-09-20 23:56:44 +00:00
Add management of legal texts
2023-12-22 01:23:18 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/legal/form.gohtml:64
msgctxt "input"
msgid "Content"
msgstr "Contenido"
#: web/templates/admin/legal/form.gohtml:84
Use I18nInput instead of L10nInput to translate carousels
2024-01-12 18:33:44 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/carousel/form.gohtml:52
Replace use of L10NInput with I18nInput for campsite
2024-01-10 20:52:49 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/feature/form.gohtml:67
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/carousel/form.gohtml:52
Add the edit form for services This one has an input to select the icon. It makes no sense to choose an icon only by name, thus a <select> is not appropriate, and had to use a hidden input with a row of button to choose the icon from. This works now only because there are very few icons; we’ll need to choose a different approach when there are many more icons. Since now the icons have to be defined in CSS for both the public and admin sections, i had to split it into a separate file that both sites can use. I considered the option to “include” that CSS with m4, like i do for images in demo.sql, but it made everything too complicated (e.g., having to call make for each change in the CSS), and decided to load that CSS in a separate <link>.
2023-09-25 18:10:33 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/form.gohtml:70
Replace use of L10NInput with I18nInput for campsite
2024-01-10 20:52:49 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/option/form.gohtml:83
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/type/form.gohtml:158
Add the edit form for services This one has an input to select the icon. It makes no sense to choose an icon only by name, thus a <select> is not appropriate, and had to use a hidden input with a row of button to choose the icon from. This works now only because there are very few icons; we’ll need to choose a different approach when there are many more icons. Since now the icons have to be defined in CSS for both the public and admin sections, i had to split it into a separate file that both sites can use. I considered the option to “include” that CSS with m4, like i do for images in demo.sql, but it made everything too complicated (e.g., having to call make for each change in the CSS), and decided to load that CSS in a separate <link>.
2023-09-25 18:10:33 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/season/form.gohtml:64
#: web/templates/admin/services/form.gohtml:69
#: web/templates/admin/media/form.gohtml:35
Manage all media uploads in a single place It made no sense to have a file upload in each form that needs a media, because to reuse an existing media users would need to upload the exact same file again; this is very unusual and unfriendly. A better option is to have a “centralized” media section, where people can upload files there, and then have a picker to select from there. Ideally, there would be an upload option in the picker, but i did not add it yet. I’ve split the content from the media because i want users to have the option to update a media, for instance when they need to upload a reduced or cropped version of the same photo, without an edit they would need to upload the file as a new media and then update all places where the old version was used. And i did not want to trouble people that uploads the same photo twice: without the separate relation, doing so would throw a constraint error. I do not believe there is any security problem to have all companies link their media to the same file, as they were already readable by everyone and could upload the data from a different company to their own; in other words, it is not worse than it was now.
2023-09-20 23:56:44 +00:00
msgctxt "action"
msgid "Update"
msgstr "Actualizar"
Add management of legal texts
2023-12-22 01:23:18 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/legal/form.gohtml:86
Use I18nInput instead of L10nInput to translate carousels
2024-01-12 18:33:44 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/carousel/form.gohtml:54
Replace use of L10NInput with I18nInput for campsite
2024-01-10 20:52:49 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/feature/form.gohtml:69
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/carousel/form.gohtml:54
Add the edit form for services This one has an input to select the icon. It makes no sense to choose an icon only by name, thus a <select> is not appropriate, and had to use a hidden input with a row of button to choose the icon from. This works now only because there are very few icons; we’ll need to choose a different approach when there are many more icons. Since now the icons have to be defined in CSS for both the public and admin sections, i had to split it into a separate file that both sites can use. I considered the option to “include” that CSS with m4, like i do for images in demo.sql, but it made everything too complicated (e.g., having to call make for each change in the CSS), and decided to load that CSS in a separate <link>.
2023-09-25 18:10:33 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/form.gohtml:72
Replace use of L10NInput with I18nInput for campsite
2024-01-10 20:52:49 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/option/form.gohtml:85
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/type/form.gohtml:160
Add the edit form for services This one has an input to select the icon. It makes no sense to choose an icon only by name, thus a <select> is not appropriate, and had to use a hidden input with a row of button to choose the icon from. This works now only because there are very few icons; we’ll need to choose a different approach when there are many more icons. Since now the icons have to be defined in CSS for both the public and admin sections, i had to split it into a separate file that both sites can use. I considered the option to “include” that CSS with m4, like i do for images in demo.sql, but it made everything too complicated (e.g., having to call make for each change in the CSS), and decided to load that CSS in a separate <link>.
2023-09-25 18:10:33 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/season/form.gohtml:66
#: web/templates/admin/services/form.gohtml:71
Manage all media uploads in a single place It made no sense to have a file upload in each form that needs a media, because to reuse an existing media users would need to upload the exact same file again; this is very unusual and unfriendly. A better option is to have a “centralized” media section, where people can upload files there, and then have a picker to select from there. Ideally, there would be an upload option in the picker, but i did not add it yet. I’ve split the content from the media because i want users to have the option to update a media, for instance when they need to upload a reduced or cropped version of the same photo, without an edit they would need to upload the file as a new media and then update all places where the old version was used. And i did not want to trouble people that uploads the same photo twice: without the separate relation, doing so would throw a constraint error. I do not believe there is any security problem to have all companies link their media to the same file, as they were already readable by everyone and could upload the data from a different company to their own; in other words, it is not worse than it was now.
2023-09-20 23:56:44 +00:00
msgctxt "action"
msgid "Add"
msgstr "Añadir"
Add management of legal texts
2023-12-22 01:23:18 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/legal/index.gohtml:6
#: web/templates/admin/legal/index.gohtml:12
#: web/templates/admin/layout.gohtml:63
msgctxt "title"
msgid "Legal Texts"
msgstr "Textos legales"
#: web/templates/admin/legal/index.gohtml:11
msgctxt "action"
msgid "Add Legal Text"
msgstr "Añadir texto legal"
#: web/templates/admin/legal/index.gohtml:17
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/feature/index.gohtml:26
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/option/index.gohtml:25
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/type/index.gohtml:25
#: web/templates/admin/season/index.gohtml:26
msgctxt "header"
msgid "Name"
msgstr "Nombre"
#: web/templates/admin/legal/index.gohtml:29
msgid "No legal texts added yet."
msgstr "No se ha añadido ningún texto legal todavía."
#: web/templates/admin/carousel/form.gohtml:8
#: web/templates/admin/carousel/form.gohtml:25
msgctxt "title"
msgid "Edit Carousel Slide"
msgstr "Edición de la diapositiva del carrusel"
#: web/templates/admin/carousel/form.gohtml:10
#: web/templates/admin/carousel/form.gohtml:27
msgctxt "title"
msgid "New Carousel Slide"
msgstr "Nueva diapositiva del carrusel"
#: web/templates/admin/carousel/form.gohtml:37
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/carousel/form.gohtml:37
msgctxt "input"
msgid "Caption"
msgstr "Leyenda"
Replace contact page with location Customer does not want a contact page, but a page where they can write the direction on how to reach the campground, with a Google map embed instead of using Leaflet, because Google Maps shows the reviews right in the map. That means i had to replace the GPS locations with XML fields for the customer to write. In all four languages. This time i tried a translation approach inspired by PrestaShop: instead of opening a new page for each language, i have all languages in the same page and use AlpineJS to show just a single language. It is far easier to write the translations, even though you do not have the source text visible, specially in this section that there is no place for me to put the language links.
2023-12-21 20:17:04 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/location.gohtml:6 web/templates/admin/location.gohtml:12
msgctxt "title"
msgid "Location Settings"
msgstr "Parámetros de cómo llegar"
#: web/templates/admin/location.gohtml:17
msgctxt "input"
msgid "Directions"
msgstr "Instrucciones"
#: web/templates/admin/location.gohtml:35
msgctxt "input"
msgid "Opening Dates"
msgstr "Fechas de apertura"
#: web/templates/admin/location.gohtml:53
msgctxt "input"
msgid "Map Embed"
msgstr "Incrustación del mapa"
#: web/templates/admin/location.gohtml:60 web/templates/admin/payment.gohtml:62
#: web/templates/admin/profile.gohtml:75
#: web/templates/admin/taxDetails.gohtml:152
msgctxt "action"
msgid "Save changes"
msgstr "Guardar los cambios"
Add the list of features for campsite type
2023-10-13 18:30:31 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/feature/form.gohtml:8
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/feature/form.gohtml:25
msgctxt "title"
msgid "Edit Campsite Type Feature"
msgstr "Edición de las características del tipo de alojamiento"
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/feature/form.gohtml:10
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/feature/form.gohtml:27
msgctxt "title"
msgid "New Campsite Type Feature"
msgstr "Nueva característica del tipo de alojamiento"
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/feature/form.gohtml:34
#: web/templates/admin/services/form.gohtml:34
msgctxt "input"
msgid "Icon"
msgstr "Icono"
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/feature/index.gohtml:6
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/feature/index.gohtml:12
msgctxt "title"
msgid "Campsite Type Features"
msgstr "Características del tipo de alojamiento"
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/feature/index.gohtml:11
msgctxt "action"
msgid "Add Feature"
msgstr "Añadir características"
Replace use of L10NInput with I18nInput for campsite
2024-01-10 20:52:49 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/feature/index.gohtml:43
Add the list of features for campsite type
2023-10-13 18:30:31 +00:00
msgid "No campsite type features added yet."
msgstr "No se ha añadido ninguna característica al tipo de alojamiento todavía."
Add the carousel for campsite types I can not reuse the carousel package because these carousels need the campsite site’s slug as a first parameters: i can not have a relation per campsite type, as i do in home and services pages, because the campsite types are added by administration types; even if i had a single relation for slides of home and services pages, these would go in a different relation due to the foreign key to campsite type. What i could reuse, however, is the Slide and SlideEntry types from that package, although i had to export carousel.Translation to be usable from the types package. I should change that to use locale.Translation, but this was the easier option, or i would need to change the queries and templates for carousel package too. Besides that, they work exactly like the slides in home and services pages.
2023-10-12 14:33:45 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/carousel/form.gohtml:8
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/carousel/form.gohtml:25
msgctxt "title"
msgid "Edit Campsite Type Carousel Slide"
msgstr "Edición de la diapositiva del carrusel del tipo de alojamiento"
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/carousel/form.gohtml:10
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/carousel/form.gohtml:27
msgctxt "title"
msgid "New Campsite Type Carousel Slide"
msgstr "Nueva diapositiva del carrusel del tipo de alojamiento"
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/carousel/index.gohtml:6
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/carousel/index.gohtml:11
msgctxt "title"
msgid "Campsite Type Carousel"
msgstr "Carrusel del tipo de alojamiento"
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/carousel/index.gohtml:12
#: web/templates/admin/services/index.gohtml:12
#: web/templates/admin/home/index.gohtml:12
msgctxt "action"
msgid "Add slide"
msgstr "Añadir diapositiva"
Add user-defined order to campsite types, options, seasons and carousels I use Sortable, exactly like HTMx’s sorting example does[0]. Had to export the slug or ID of some entries to be able to add it in the hidden input. For forms that use ID instead of slug, had to use an input name other than “id” because otherwise the swap would fail due to bug #1496[1]. It is apparently fixed in a recent version of HTMx, but i did not want to update for fear of behaviour changes. [0]: https://htmx.org/examples/sortable/ [1]: https://github.com/bigskysoftware/htmx/issues/1496
2023-12-20 18:52:14 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/carousel/index.gohtml:25
#: web/templates/admin/services/index.gohtml:25
#: web/templates/admin/home/index.gohtml:25
Add the carousel for campsite types I can not reuse the carousel package because these carousels need the campsite site’s slug as a first parameters: i can not have a relation per campsite type, as i do in home and services pages, because the campsite types are added by administration types; even if i had a single relation for slides of home and services pages, these would go in a different relation due to the foreign key to campsite type. What i could reuse, however, is the Slide and SlideEntry types from that package, although i had to export carousel.Translation to be usable from the types package. I should change that to use locale.Translation, but this was the easier option, or i would need to change the queries and templates for carousel package too. Besides that, they work exactly like the slides in home and services pages.
2023-10-12 14:33:45 +00:00
msgctxt "header"
msgid "Image"
msgstr "Imagen"
Add user-defined order to campsite types, options, seasons and carousels I use Sortable, exactly like HTMx’s sorting example does[0]. Had to export the slug or ID of some entries to be able to add it in the hidden input. For forms that use ID instead of slug, had to use an input name other than “id” because otherwise the swap would fail due to bug #1496[1]. It is apparently fixed in a recent version of HTMx, but i did not want to update for fear of behaviour changes. [0]: https://htmx.org/examples/sortable/ [1]: https://github.com/bigskysoftware/htmx/issues/1496
2023-12-20 18:52:14 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/carousel/index.gohtml:26
#: web/templates/admin/services/index.gohtml:26
#: web/templates/admin/home/index.gohtml:26
Add the carousel for campsite types I can not reuse the carousel package because these carousels need the campsite site’s slug as a first parameters: i can not have a relation per campsite type, as i do in home and services pages, because the campsite types are added by administration types; even if i had a single relation for slides of home and services pages, these would go in a different relation due to the foreign key to campsite type. What i could reuse, however, is the Slide and SlideEntry types from that package, although i had to export carousel.Translation to be usable from the types package. I should change that to use locale.Translation, but this was the easier option, or i would need to change the queries and templates for carousel package too. Besides that, they work exactly like the slides in home and services pages.
2023-10-12 14:33:45 +00:00
msgctxt "header"
msgid "Caption"
msgstr "Leyenda"
Replace use of L10NInput with I18nInput for campsite
2024-01-10 20:52:49 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/carousel/index.gohtml:27
Use I18nInput instead of L10nInput to translate carousels
2024-01-12 18:33:44 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/services/index.gohtml:27
#: web/templates/admin/services/index.gohtml:64
#: web/templates/admin/home/index.gohtml:27
Add the carousel for campsite types I can not reuse the carousel package because these carousels need the campsite site’s slug as a first parameters: i can not have a relation per campsite type, as i do in home and services pages, because the campsite types are added by administration types; even if i had a single relation for slides of home and services pages, these would go in a different relation due to the foreign key to campsite type. What i could reuse, however, is the Slide and SlideEntry types from that package, although i had to export carousel.Translation to be usable from the types package. I should change that to use locale.Translation, but this was the easier option, or i would need to change the queries and templates for carousel package too. Besides that, they work exactly like the slides in home and services pages.
2023-10-12 14:33:45 +00:00
msgctxt "header"
msgid "Actions"
msgstr "Acciones"
Replace use of L10NInput with I18nInput for campsite
2024-01-10 20:52:49 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/carousel/index.gohtml:31
Use I18nInput instead of L10nInput to translate carousels
2024-01-12 18:33:44 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/services/index.gohtml:31
#: web/templates/admin/home/index.gohtml:31
Add the carousel for campsite types I can not reuse the carousel package because these carousels need the campsite site’s slug as a first parameters: i can not have a relation per campsite type, as i do in home and services pages, because the campsite types are added by administration types; even if i had a single relation for slides of home and services pages, these would go in a different relation due to the foreign key to campsite type. What i could reuse, however, is the Slide and SlideEntry types from that package, although i had to export carousel.Translation to be usable from the types package. I should change that to use locale.Translation, but this was the easier option, or i would need to change the queries and templates for carousel package too. Besides that, they work exactly like the slides in home and services pages.
2023-10-12 14:33:45 +00:00
msgid "Are you sure you wish to delete this slide?"
msgstr "¿Estáis seguro de querer borrar esta diapositiva?"
Replace use of L10NInput with I18nInput for campsite
2024-01-10 20:52:49 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/carousel/index.gohtml:45
Use I18nInput instead of L10nInput to translate carousels
2024-01-12 18:33:44 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/services/index.gohtml:44
#: web/templates/admin/services/index.gohtml:83
#: web/templates/admin/home/index.gohtml:44
Add the carousel for campsite types I can not reuse the carousel package because these carousels need the campsite site’s slug as a first parameters: i can not have a relation per campsite type, as i do in home and services pages, because the campsite types are added by administration types; even if i had a single relation for slides of home and services pages, these would go in a different relation due to the foreign key to campsite type. What i could reuse, however, is the Slide and SlideEntry types from that package, although i had to export carousel.Translation to be usable from the types package. I should change that to use locale.Translation, but this was the easier option, or i would need to change the queries and templates for carousel package too. Besides that, they work exactly like the slides in home and services pages.
2023-10-12 14:33:45 +00:00
msgctxt "action"
msgid "Delete"
msgstr "Borrar"
Replace use of L10NInput with I18nInput for campsite
2024-01-10 20:52:49 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/carousel/index.gohtml:54
Use I18nInput instead of L10nInput to translate carousels
2024-01-12 18:33:44 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/services/index.gohtml:53
#: web/templates/admin/home/index.gohtml:53
Add the carousel for campsite types I can not reuse the carousel package because these carousels need the campsite site’s slug as a first parameters: i can not have a relation per campsite type, as i do in home and services pages, because the campsite types are added by administration types; even if i had a single relation for slides of home and services pages, these would go in a different relation due to the foreign key to campsite type. What i could reuse, however, is the Slide and SlideEntry types from that package, although i had to export carousel.Translation to be usable from the types package. I should change that to use locale.Translation, but this was the easier option, or i would need to change the queries and templates for carousel package too. Besides that, they work exactly like the slides in home and services pages.
2023-10-12 14:33:45 +00:00
msgid "No slides added yet."
msgstr "No se ha añadido ninguna diapositiva todavía."
Add the campsite relation, HTTP handlers, and form For now, there is only the label, type, and active fields. We will need some field to hold the area on the map, but this requires #4, and possibly #6, to be finished. Part of #27.
2023-08-14 18:18:26 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/form.gohtml:8
Add the edit form for services This one has an input to select the icon. It makes no sense to choose an icon only by name, thus a <select> is not appropriate, and had to use a hidden input with a row of button to choose the icon from. This works now only because there are very few icons; we’ll need to choose a different approach when there are many more icons. Since now the icons have to be defined in CSS for both the public and admin sections, i had to split it into a separate file that both sites can use. I considered the option to “include” that CSS with m4, like i do for images in demo.sql, but it made everything too complicated (e.g., having to call make for each change in the CSS), and decided to load that CSS in a separate <link>.
2023-09-25 18:10:33 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/form.gohtml:25
Add public page for campsite type, and function to edit them Had to export and move PublicPage struct to template because i can not import app from campsites/types: app already imports campsite for the http handler, and it, in turn, imports the types package for its own http handler; an import loop. Also had to replace PublicPage.MustRender with a Setup function because the page passed down to html/template was the PublicPage struct, not whatever struct embeds it. I was thinking more of Java inheritance here rather than struct embedding.
2023-08-08 00:29:14 +00:00
msgctxt "title"
Add the campsite relation, HTTP handlers, and form For now, there is only the label, type, and active fields. We will need some field to hold the area on the map, but this requires #4, and possibly #6, to be finished. Part of #27.
2023-08-14 18:18:26 +00:00
msgid "Edit Campsite"
msgstr "Edición del alojamientos"
Add public page for campsite type, and function to edit them Had to export and move PublicPage struct to template because i can not import app from campsites/types: app already imports campsite for the http handler, and it, in turn, imports the types package for its own http handler; an import loop. Also had to replace PublicPage.MustRender with a Setup function because the page passed down to html/template was the PublicPage struct, not whatever struct embeds it. I was thinking more of Java inheritance here rather than struct embedding.
2023-08-08 00:29:14 +00:00
Add the campsite relation, HTTP handlers, and form For now, there is only the label, type, and active fields. We will need some field to hold the area on the map, but this requires #4, and possibly #6, to be finished. Part of #27.
2023-08-14 18:18:26 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/form.gohtml:10
Add the edit form for services This one has an input to select the icon. It makes no sense to choose an icon only by name, thus a <select> is not appropriate, and had to use a hidden input with a row of button to choose the icon from. This works now only because there are very few icons; we’ll need to choose a different approach when there are many more icons. Since now the icons have to be defined in CSS for both the public and admin sections, i had to split it into a separate file that both sites can use. I considered the option to “include” that CSS with m4, like i do for images in demo.sql, but it made everything too complicated (e.g., having to call make for each change in the CSS), and decided to load that CSS in a separate <link>.
2023-09-25 18:10:33 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/form.gohtml:27
Add add_campsite_type function and call it from Go with a proper form This form has an “HTML field”, which is just a <textarea> but “improved” with the use of Automattic’s isolated block editor[0], a repackaged Gutenberg’s editor playground as full-featured multi-instance editor that does not require WordPress. I do not want to use Node to build this huge, over-engineered piece of … software. Therefore, i downloaded the released “browser” package, and added the required React bundle, like i do with HTMx. This will hold until i need a new custom block type; let’s hope i will not need it. [0]: https://github.com/Automattic/isolated-block-editor
2023-08-04 17:59:58 +00:00
msgctxt "title"
Add the campsite relation, HTTP handlers, and form For now, there is only the label, type, and active fields. We will need some field to hold the area on the map, but this requires #4, and possibly #6, to be finished. Part of #27.
2023-08-14 18:18:26 +00:00
msgid "New Campsite"
msgstr "Nuevo alojamiento"
Add add_campsite_type function and call it from Go with a proper form This form has an “HTML field”, which is just a <textarea> but “improved” with the use of Automattic’s isolated block editor[0], a repackaged Gutenberg’s editor playground as full-featured multi-instance editor that does not require WordPress. I do not want to use Node to build this huge, over-engineered piece of … software. Therefore, i downloaded the released “browser” package, and added the required React bundle, like i do with HTMx. This will hold until i need a new custom block type; let’s hope i will not need it. [0]: https://github.com/Automattic/isolated-block-editor
2023-08-04 17:59:58 +00:00
Add the edit form for services This one has an input to select the icon. It makes no sense to choose an icon only by name, thus a <select> is not appropriate, and had to use a hidden input with a row of button to choose the icon from. This works now only because there are very few icons; we’ll need to choose a different approach when there are many more icons. Since now the icons have to be defined in CSS for both the public and admin sections, i had to split it into a separate file that both sites can use. I considered the option to “include” that CSS with m4, like i do for images in demo.sql, but it made everything too complicated (e.g., having to call make for each change in the CSS), and decided to load that CSS in a separate <link>.
2023-09-25 18:10:33 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/form.gohtml:37
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/index.gohtml:20
Add seasons’ relation, functions, and admin section Seasons have a color to show on the calendar. I need them in HTML format (e.g., #123abc) in order to set as value to `<input type="color">`, but i did not want to save them as text in the database, as integers are better representations of colors—in fact, that’s what the HTML syntax also is: an integer. I think the best would be to create an extension that adds an HTML color type, with functions to convert from many representations (e.g., CSS’ rgb or even color names) to integer and back. However, that’s a lot of work and i can satisfy Camper’s needs with just a couple of functions and a domain. To show the color on the index, at first tried to use a read-only `<input type="color">`, but seems that this type of input can not be read-only and must be disabled instead. However, i do not know whether it makes sense to have a disabled input outside a form “just” to show a color; i suspect it does not. Thus, at the end i use SVG with a single circle, which is better that a 50%-rounded div with a background color, even if the result is the same—SVG **is** intended for showing pictures, which is this case.
2023-08-16 18:15:57 +00:00
msgctxt "campsite"
Add the Active field to the campsite type’s edit form and function In the new form this field is hidden and always active, because it makes no sense to add an inactive campsite type.
2023-08-14 09:43:58 +00:00
msgid "Active"
msgstr "Activo"
Add the edit form for services This one has an input to select the icon. It makes no sense to choose an icon only by name, thus a <select> is not appropriate, and had to use a hidden input with a row of button to choose the icon from. This works now only because there are very few icons; we’ll need to choose a different approach when there are many more icons. Since now the icons have to be defined in CSS for both the public and admin sections, i had to split it into a separate file that both sites can use. I considered the option to “include” that CSS with m4, like i do for images in demo.sql, but it made everything too complicated (e.g., having to call make for each change in the CSS), and decided to load that CSS in a separate <link>.
2023-09-25 18:10:33 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/form.gohtml:46
Add add_campsite_type function and call it from Go with a proper form This form has an “HTML field”, which is just a <textarea> but “improved” with the use of Automattic’s isolated block editor[0], a repackaged Gutenberg’s editor playground as full-featured multi-instance editor that does not require WordPress. I do not want to use Node to build this huge, over-engineered piece of … software. Therefore, i downloaded the released “browser” package, and added the required React bundle, like i do with HTMx. This will hold until i need a new custom block type; let’s hope i will not need it. [0]: https://github.com/Automattic/isolated-block-editor
2023-08-04 17:59:58 +00:00
msgctxt "input"
Add the campsite relation, HTTP handlers, and form For now, there is only the label, type, and active fields. We will need some field to hold the area on the map, but this requires #4, and possibly #6, to be finished. Part of #27.
2023-08-14 18:18:26 +00:00
msgid "Campsite Type"
msgstr "Tipo de alojamiento"
Add add_campsite_type function and call it from Go with a proper form This form has an “HTML field”, which is just a <textarea> but “improved” with the use of Automattic’s isolated block editor[0], a repackaged Gutenberg’s editor playground as full-featured multi-instance editor that does not require WordPress. I do not want to use Node to build this huge, over-engineered piece of … software. Therefore, i downloaded the released “browser” package, and added the required React bundle, like i do with HTMx. This will hold until i need a new custom block type; let’s hope i will not need it. [0]: https://github.com/Automattic/isolated-block-editor
2023-08-04 17:59:58 +00:00
Add the edit form for services This one has an input to select the icon. It makes no sense to choose an icon only by name, thus a <select> is not appropriate, and had to use a hidden input with a row of button to choose the icon from. This works now only because there are very few icons; we’ll need to choose a different approach when there are many more icons. Since now the icons have to be defined in CSS for both the public and admin sections, i had to split it into a separate file that both sites can use. I considered the option to “include” that CSS with m4, like i do for images in demo.sql, but it made everything too complicated (e.g., having to call make for each change in the CSS), and decided to load that CSS in a separate <link>.
2023-09-25 18:10:33 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/form.gohtml:51
Add the campsite relation, HTTP handlers, and form For now, there is only the label, type, and active fields. We will need some field to hold the area on the map, but this requires #4, and possibly #6, to be finished. Part of #27.
2023-08-14 18:18:26 +00:00
msgid "Select campsite type"
msgstr "Escoged un tipo de alojamiento"
Add the edit form for services This one has an input to select the icon. It makes no sense to choose an icon only by name, thus a <select> is not appropriate, and had to use a hidden input with a row of button to choose the icon from. This works now only because there are very few icons; we’ll need to choose a different approach when there are many more icons. Since now the icons have to be defined in CSS for both the public and admin sections, i had to split it into a separate file that both sites can use. I considered the option to “include” that CSS with m4, like i do for images in demo.sql, but it made everything too complicated (e.g., having to call make for each change in the CSS), and decided to load that CSS in a separate <link>.
2023-09-25 18:10:33 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/form.gohtml:60
Add add_campsite_type function and call it from Go with a proper form This form has an “HTML field”, which is just a <textarea> but “improved” with the use of Automattic’s isolated block editor[0], a repackaged Gutenberg’s editor playground as full-featured multi-instance editor that does not require WordPress. I do not want to use Node to build this huge, over-engineered piece of … software. Therefore, i downloaded the released “browser” package, and added the required React bundle, like i do with HTMx. This will hold until i need a new custom block type; let’s hope i will not need it. [0]: https://github.com/Automattic/isolated-block-editor
2023-08-04 17:59:58 +00:00
msgctxt "input"
Add the campsite relation, HTTP handlers, and form For now, there is only the label, type, and active fields. We will need some field to hold the area on the map, but this requires #4, and possibly #6, to be finished. Part of #27.
2023-08-14 18:18:26 +00:00
msgid "Label"
msgstr "Etiqueta"
Add add_campsite_type function and call it from Go with a proper form This form has an “HTML field”, which is just a <textarea> but “improved” with the use of Automattic’s isolated block editor[0], a repackaged Gutenberg’s editor playground as full-featured multi-instance editor that does not require WordPress. I do not want to use Node to build this huge, over-engineered piece of … software. Therefore, i downloaded the released “browser” package, and added the required React bundle, like i do with HTMx. This will hold until i need a new custom block type; let’s hope i will not need it. [0]: https://github.com/Automattic/isolated-block-editor
2023-08-04 17:59:58 +00:00
Add campsite type options, mainly for plots
2023-10-06 11:26:01 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/option/form.gohtml:8
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/option/form.gohtml:25
msgctxt "title"
msgid "Edit Campsite Type Option"
msgstr "Edición de la opción del tipo de alojamiento"
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/option/form.gohtml:10
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/option/form.gohtml:27
msgctxt "title"
msgid "New Campsite Type Option"
msgstr "Nueva opción del tipo de alojamiento"
Replace use of L10NInput with I18nInput for campsite
2024-01-10 20:52:49 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/option/form.gohtml:47
Add campsite type options, mainly for plots
2023-10-06 11:26:01 +00:00
msgctxt "input"
msgid "Minimum"
msgstr "Mínimo"
Replace use of L10NInput with I18nInput for campsite
2024-01-10 20:52:49 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/option/form.gohtml:55
Add campsite type options, mainly for plots
2023-10-06 11:26:01 +00:00
msgctxt "input"
msgid "Maximum"
msgstr "Màximo"
Replace use of L10NInput with I18nInput for campsite
2024-01-10 20:52:49 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/option/form.gohtml:69
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/type/form.gohtml:84
Add campsite type options, mainly for plots
2023-10-06 11:26:01 +00:00
msgctxt "input"
msgid "Price per night"
msgstr "Precio por noche"
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/option/index.gohtml:6
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/option/index.gohtml:12
msgctxt "title"
msgid "Campsite Type Options"
msgstr "Opciones del tipo de alojamiento"
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/option/index.gohtml:11
msgctxt "action"
msgid "Add Option"
msgstr "Añadir opción"
Replace use of L10NInput with I18nInput for campsite
2024-01-10 20:52:49 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/option/index.gohtml:42
Add campsite type options, mainly for plots
2023-10-06 11:26:01 +00:00
msgid "No campsite type options added yet."
msgstr "No se ha añadido ninguna opció al tipo de alojamiento todavía."
Add the edit form for services This one has an input to select the icon. It makes no sense to choose an icon only by name, thus a <select> is not appropriate, and had to use a hidden input with a row of button to choose the icon from. This works now only because there are very few icons; we’ll need to choose a different approach when there are many more icons. Since now the icons have to be defined in CSS for both the public and admin sections, i had to split it into a separate file that both sites can use. I considered the option to “include” that CSS with m4, like i do for images in demo.sql, but it made everything too complicated (e.g., having to call make for each change in the CSS), and decided to load that CSS in a separate <link>.
2023-09-25 18:10:33 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/index.gohtml:11
Add the campsite relation, HTTP handlers, and form For now, there is only the label, type, and active fields. We will need some field to hold the area on the map, but this requires #4, and possibly #6, to be finished. Part of #27.
2023-08-14 18:18:26 +00:00
msgctxt "action"
msgid "Add Campsite"
msgstr "Añadir alojamiento"
Add the edit form for services This one has an input to select the icon. It makes no sense to choose an icon only by name, thus a <select> is not appropriate, and had to use a hidden input with a row of button to choose the icon from. This works now only because there are very few icons; we’ll need to choose a different approach when there are many more icons. Since now the icons have to be defined in CSS for both the public and admin sections, i had to split it into a separate file that both sites can use. I considered the option to “include” that CSS with m4, like i do for images in demo.sql, but it made everything too complicated (e.g., having to call make for each change in the CSS), and decided to load that CSS in a separate <link>.
2023-09-25 18:10:33 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/index.gohtml:18
Add the campsite relation, HTTP handlers, and form For now, there is only the label, type, and active fields. We will need some field to hold the area on the map, but this requires #4, and possibly #6, to be finished. Part of #27.
2023-08-14 18:18:26 +00:00
msgctxt "header"
msgid "Label"
msgstr "Etiqueta"
Add the edit form for services This one has an input to select the icon. It makes no sense to choose an icon only by name, thus a <select> is not appropriate, and had to use a hidden input with a row of button to choose the icon from. This works now only because there are very few icons; we’ll need to choose a different approach when there are many more icons. Since now the icons have to be defined in CSS for both the public and admin sections, i had to split it into a separate file that both sites can use. I considered the option to “include” that CSS with m4, like i do for images in demo.sql, but it made everything too complicated (e.g., having to call make for each change in the CSS), and decided to load that CSS in a separate <link>.
2023-09-25 18:10:33 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/index.gohtml:19
Add the campsite relation, HTTP handlers, and form For now, there is only the label, type, and active fields. We will need some field to hold the area on the map, but this requires #4, and possibly #6, to be finished. Part of #27.
2023-08-14 18:18:26 +00:00
msgctxt "header"
msgid "Type"
msgstr "Tipo"
Add the edit form for services This one has an input to select the icon. It makes no sense to choose an icon only by name, thus a <select> is not appropriate, and had to use a hidden input with a row of button to choose the icon from. This works now only because there are very few icons; we’ll need to choose a different approach when there are many more icons. Since now the icons have to be defined in CSS for both the public and admin sections, i had to split it into a separate file that both sites can use. I considered the option to “include” that CSS with m4, like i do for images in demo.sql, but it made everything too complicated (e.g., having to call make for each change in the CSS), and decided to load that CSS in a separate <link>.
2023-09-25 18:10:33 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/index.gohtml:28
Replace use of L10NInput with I18nInput for campsite
2024-01-10 20:52:49 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/type/index.gohtml:49
Add user-defined order to campsite types, options, seasons and carousels I use Sortable, exactly like HTMx’s sorting example does[0]. Had to export the slug or ID of some entries to be able to add it in the hidden input. For forms that use ID instead of slug, had to use an input name other than “id” because otherwise the swap would fail due to bug #1496[1]. It is apparently fixed in a recent version of HTMx, but i did not want to update for fear of behaviour changes. [0]: https://htmx.org/examples/sortable/ [1]: https://github.com/bigskysoftware/htmx/issues/1496
2023-12-20 18:52:14 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/season/index.gohtml:49
Add the campsite relation, HTTP handlers, and form For now, there is only the label, type, and active fields. We will need some field to hold the area on the map, but this requires #4, and possibly #6, to be finished. Part of #27.
2023-08-14 18:18:26 +00:00
msgid "Yes"
msgstr "Sí"
Add the edit form for services This one has an input to select the icon. It makes no sense to choose an icon only by name, thus a <select> is not appropriate, and had to use a hidden input with a row of button to choose the icon from. This works now only because there are very few icons; we’ll need to choose a different approach when there are many more icons. Since now the icons have to be defined in CSS for both the public and admin sections, i had to split it into a separate file that both sites can use. I considered the option to “include” that CSS with m4, like i do for images in demo.sql, but it made everything too complicated (e.g., having to call make for each change in the CSS), and decided to load that CSS in a separate <link>.
2023-09-25 18:10:33 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/index.gohtml:28
Replace use of L10NInput with I18nInput for campsite
2024-01-10 20:52:49 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/type/index.gohtml:49
Add user-defined order to campsite types, options, seasons and carousels I use Sortable, exactly like HTMx’s sorting example does[0]. Had to export the slug or ID of some entries to be able to add it in the hidden input. For forms that use ID instead of slug, had to use an input name other than “id” because otherwise the swap would fail due to bug #1496[1]. It is apparently fixed in a recent version of HTMx, but i did not want to update for fear of behaviour changes. [0]: https://htmx.org/examples/sortable/ [1]: https://github.com/bigskysoftware/htmx/issues/1496
2023-12-20 18:52:14 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/season/index.gohtml:49
Add the campsite relation, HTTP handlers, and form For now, there is only the label, type, and active fields. We will need some field to hold the area on the map, but this requires #4, and possibly #6, to be finished. Part of #27.
2023-08-14 18:18:26 +00:00
msgid "No"
msgstr "No"
Add the edit form for services This one has an input to select the icon. It makes no sense to choose an icon only by name, thus a <select> is not appropriate, and had to use a hidden input with a row of button to choose the icon from. This works now only because there are very few icons; we’ll need to choose a different approach when there are many more icons. Since now the icons have to be defined in CSS for both the public and admin sections, i had to split it into a separate file that both sites can use. I considered the option to “include” that CSS with m4, like i do for images in demo.sql, but it made everything too complicated (e.g., having to call make for each change in the CSS), and decided to load that CSS in a separate <link>.
2023-09-25 18:10:33 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/index.gohtml:34
Add the campsite relation, HTTP handlers, and form For now, there is only the label, type, and active fields. We will need some field to hold the area on the map, but this requires #4, and possibly #6, to be finished. Part of #27.
2023-08-14 18:18:26 +00:00
msgid "No campsites added yet."
msgstr "No se ha añadido ningún alojamiento todavía."
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/type/form.gohtml:8
Add the edit form for services This one has an input to select the icon. It makes no sense to choose an icon only by name, thus a <select> is not appropriate, and had to use a hidden input with a row of button to choose the icon from. This works now only because there are very few icons; we’ll need to choose a different approach when there are many more icons. Since now the icons have to be defined in CSS for both the public and admin sections, i had to split it into a separate file that both sites can use. I considered the option to “include” that CSS with m4, like i do for images in demo.sql, but it made everything too complicated (e.g., having to call make for each change in the CSS), and decided to load that CSS in a separate <link>.
2023-09-25 18:10:33 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/type/form.gohtml:25
Add the campsite relation, HTTP handlers, and form For now, there is only the label, type, and active fields. We will need some field to hold the area on the map, but this requires #4, and possibly #6, to be finished. Part of #27.
2023-08-14 18:18:26 +00:00
msgctxt "title"
msgid "Edit Campsite Type"
Add campsite type options, mainly for plots
2023-10-06 11:26:01 +00:00
msgstr "Edición del tipo de alojamiento"
Add the campsite relation, HTTP handlers, and form For now, there is only the label, type, and active fields. We will need some field to hold the area on the map, but this requires #4, and possibly #6, to be finished. Part of #27.
2023-08-14 18:18:26 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/type/form.gohtml:10
Add the edit form for services This one has an input to select the icon. It makes no sense to choose an icon only by name, thus a <select> is not appropriate, and had to use a hidden input with a row of button to choose the icon from. This works now only because there are very few icons; we’ll need to choose a different approach when there are many more icons. Since now the icons have to be defined in CSS for both the public and admin sections, i had to split it into a separate file that both sites can use. I considered the option to “include” that CSS with m4, like i do for images in demo.sql, but it made everything too complicated (e.g., having to call make for each change in the CSS), and decided to load that CSS in a separate <link>.
2023-09-25 18:10:33 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/type/form.gohtml:27
Add the campsite relation, HTTP handlers, and form For now, there is only the label, type, and active fields. We will need some field to hold the area on the map, but this requires #4, and possibly #6, to be finished. Part of #27.
2023-08-14 18:18:26 +00:00
msgctxt "title"
msgid "New Campsite Type"
msgstr "Nuevo tipo de alojamiento"
Add the edit form for services This one has an input to select the icon. It makes no sense to choose an icon only by name, thus a <select> is not appropriate, and had to use a hidden input with a row of button to choose the icon from. This works now only because there are very few icons; we’ll need to choose a different approach when there are many more icons. Since now the icons have to be defined in CSS for both the public and admin sections, i had to split it into a separate file that both sites can use. I considered the option to “include” that CSS with m4, like i do for images in demo.sql, but it made everything too complicated (e.g., having to call make for each change in the CSS), and decided to load that CSS in a separate <link>.
2023-09-25 18:10:33 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/type/form.gohtml:37
Replace use of L10NInput with I18nInput for campsite
2024-01-10 20:52:49 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/type/index.gohtml:29
Add seasons’ relation, functions, and admin section Seasons have a color to show on the calendar. I need them in HTML format (e.g., #123abc) in order to set as value to `<input type="color">`, but i did not want to save them as text in the database, as integers are better representations of colors—in fact, that’s what the HTML syntax also is: an integer. I think the best would be to create an extension that adds an HTML color type, with functions to convert from many representations (e.g., CSS’ rgb or even color names) to integer and back. However, that’s a lot of work and i can satisfy Camper’s needs with just a couple of functions and a domain. To show the color on the index, at first tried to use a read-only `<input type="color">`, but seems that this type of input can not be read-only and must be disabled instead. However, i do not know whether it makes sense to have a disabled input outside a form “just” to show a color; i suspect it does not. Thus, at the end i use SVG with a single circle, which is better that a 50%-rounded div with a background color, even if the result is the same—SVG **is** intended for showing pictures, which is this case.
2023-08-16 18:15:57 +00:00
msgctxt "campsite type"
msgid "Active"
msgstr "Activo"
Replace use of L10NInput with I18nInput for campsite
2024-01-10 20:52:49 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/type/form.gohtml:62
Add max campers and dogs allowed fields to campsite types
2023-09-29 18:17:39 +00:00
msgctxt "input"
msgid "Maximum number of campers"
msgstr "Número máximo de personas"
Replace use of L10NInput with I18nInput for campsite
2024-01-10 20:52:49 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/type/form.gohtml:72
Add max campers and dogs allowed fields to campsite types
2023-09-29 18:17:39 +00:00
msgctxt "input"
msgid "Dogs allowed"
msgstr "Se permiten perros"
Replace use of L10NInput with I18nInput for campsite
2024-01-10 20:52:49 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/type/form.gohtml:92
Add the campsite type cost per season
2023-10-01 19:14:39 +00:00
msgctxt "input"
msgid "Minimum number of nights"
msgstr "Número mínimos de noches"
Replace use of L10NInput with I18nInput for campsite
2024-01-10 20:52:49 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/type/form.gohtml:104
Add the “spiel” for campsite types This is the text that introduces the carousel; it is not a spiel, but this is what i call it. It turns out that this text needs to have paragraphs and headings, much like home’s slider, rather than the one in services page, thus no need to change its font size or to align all items in the carousel in the middle.
2023-10-12 16:47:08 +00:00
msgctxt "input"
msgid "Spiel"
msgstr "Introducción"
Replace use of L10NInput with I18nInput for campsite
2024-01-10 20:52:49 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/type/form.gohtml:117
Add the info and facilities fields to campsite type I wish CKEditor would have support for <dl>, but it is unlikely that they will add any time soon[0], specially when in 2018 they already “forgotten”[1] that this was requested back in 2007[2]. Therefore, in the demo i did it more or less like in the original design, with “extra” <h4>, although i added them under a <h3>, to avoid “gaps” in the outline. [0]: https://github.com/ckeditor/ckeditor5/issues/775 [1]: https://github.com/ckeditor/ckeditor5/issues/775#issuecomment-358591747 [2]: https://dev.ckeditor.com/ticket/1333
2023-10-13 11:40:48 +00:00
msgctxt "input"
msgid "Info"
msgstr "Información"
Replace use of L10NInput with I18nInput for campsite
2024-01-10 20:52:49 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/type/form.gohtml:130
Add the info and facilities fields to campsite type I wish CKEditor would have support for <dl>, but it is unlikely that they will add any time soon[0], specially when in 2018 they already “forgotten”[1] that this was requested back in 2007[2]. Therefore, in the demo i did it more or less like in the original design, with “extra” <h4>, although i added them under a <h3>, to avoid “gaps” in the outline. [0]: https://github.com/ckeditor/ckeditor5/issues/775 [1]: https://github.com/ckeditor/ckeditor5/issues/775#issuecomment-358591747 [2]: https://dev.ckeditor.com/ticket/1333
2023-10-13 11:40:48 +00:00
msgctxt "input"
msgid "Facilities"
msgstr "Equipamento"
Replace use of L10NInput with I18nInput for campsite
2024-01-10 20:52:49 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/type/form.gohtml:143
Add the edit form for services This one has an input to select the icon. It makes no sense to choose an icon only by name, thus a <select> is not appropriate, and had to use a hidden input with a row of button to choose the icon from. This works now only because there are very few icons; we’ll need to choose a different approach when there are many more icons. Since now the icons have to be defined in CSS for both the public and admin sections, i had to split it into a separate file that both sites can use. I considered the option to “include” that CSS with m4, like i do for images in demo.sql, but it made everything too complicated (e.g., having to call make for each change in the CSS), and decided to load that CSS in a separate <link>.
2023-09-25 18:10:33 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/services/form.gohtml:60
#: web/templates/admin/services/l10n.gohtml:32
Add the campsite relation, HTTP handlers, and form For now, there is only the label, type, and active fields. We will need some field to hold the area on the map, but this requires #4, and possibly #6, to be finished. Part of #27.
2023-08-14 18:18:26 +00:00
msgctxt "input"
msgid "Description"
msgstr "Descripción"
Split templates and handlers into admin and public I need to check that the user is an employee (or admin) in administration handlers, but i do not want to do it for each handler, because i am bound to forget it. Thus, i added the /admin sub-path for these resources. The public-facing web is the rest of the resources outside /admin, but for now there is only home, to test whether it works as expected or not. The public-facing web can not relay on the user’s language settings, as the guest user has no way to set that. I would be happy to just use the Accept-Language header for that, but apparently Google does not use that header[0], and they give four alternatives: a country-specific domain, a subdomain with a generic top-level domain (gTLD), subdirectories with a gTLD, or URL parameters (e.g., site.com?loc=de). Of the four, Google does not recommend URL parameters, and the customer is already using subdirectories with the current site, therefor that’s what i have chosen. Google also tells me that it is a very good idea to have links between localized version of the same resources, either with <link> elements, Link HTTP response headers, or a sitemap file[1]; they are all equivalent in the eyes of Google. I have choosen the Link response headers way, because for that i can simply “augment” ResponseHeader to automatically add these headers when the response status is 2xx, otherwise i would need to pass down the original URL path until it reaches the template. Even though Camper is supposed to be a “generic”, multi-company application, i think i will stick to the easiest route and write the templates for just the “first” customer. [0]: https://developers.google.com/search/docs/specialty/international/managing-multi-regional-sites [1]: https://developers.google.com/search/docs/specialty/international/localized-versions
2023-08-05 01:42:37 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/type/index.gohtml:6
Add the edit form for services This one has an input to select the icon. It makes no sense to choose an icon only by name, thus a <select> is not appropriate, and had to use a hidden input with a row of button to choose the icon from. This works now only because there are very few icons; we’ll need to choose a different approach when there are many more icons. Since now the icons have to be defined in CSS for both the public and admin sections, i had to split it into a separate file that both sites can use. I considered the option to “include” that CSS with m4, like i do for images in demo.sql, but it made everything too complicated (e.g., having to call make for each change in the CSS), and decided to load that CSS in a separate <link>.
2023-09-25 18:10:33 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/type/index.gohtml:12
Replace contact page with location Customer does not want a contact page, but a page where they can write the direction on how to reach the campground, with a Google map embed instead of using Leaflet, because Google Maps shows the reviews right in the map. That means i had to replace the GPS locations with XML fields for the customer to write. In all four languages. This time i tried a translation approach inspired by PrestaShop: instead of opening a new page for each language, i have all languages in the same page and use AlpineJS to show just a single language. It is far easier to write the translations, even though you do not have the source text visible, specially in this section that there is no place for me to put the language links.
2023-12-21 20:17:04 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/layout.gohtml:42
Add add_campsite_type function and call it from Go with a proper form This form has an “HTML field”, which is just a <textarea> but “improved” with the use of Automattic’s isolated block editor[0], a repackaged Gutenberg’s editor playground as full-featured multi-instance editor that does not require WordPress. I do not want to use Node to build this huge, over-engineered piece of … software. Therefore, i downloaded the released “browser” package, and added the required React bundle, like i do with HTMx. This will hold until i need a new custom block type; let’s hope i will not need it. [0]: https://github.com/Automattic/isolated-block-editor
2023-08-04 17:59:58 +00:00
msgctxt "title"
msgid "Campsite Types"
msgstr "Tipos de alojamientos"
Add the edit form for services This one has an input to select the icon. It makes no sense to choose an icon only by name, thus a <select> is not appropriate, and had to use a hidden input with a row of button to choose the icon from. This works now only because there are very few icons; we’ll need to choose a different approach when there are many more icons. Since now the icons have to be defined in CSS for both the public and admin sections, i had to split it into a separate file that both sites can use. I considered the option to “include” that CSS with m4, like i do for images in demo.sql, but it made everything too complicated (e.g., having to call make for each change in the CSS), and decided to load that CSS in a separate <link>.
2023-09-25 18:10:33 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/type/index.gohtml:11
Add add_campsite_type function and call it from Go with a proper form This form has an “HTML field”, which is just a <textarea> but “improved” with the use of Automattic’s isolated block editor[0], a repackaged Gutenberg’s editor playground as full-featured multi-instance editor that does not require WordPress. I do not want to use Node to build this huge, over-engineered piece of … software. Therefore, i downloaded the released “browser” package, and added the required React bundle, like i do with HTMx. This will hold until i need a new custom block type; let’s hope i will not need it. [0]: https://github.com/Automattic/isolated-block-editor
2023-08-04 17:59:58 +00:00
msgctxt "action"
msgid "Add Type"
msgstr "Añadir tipo"
Replace use of L10NInput with I18nInput for campsite
2024-01-10 20:52:49 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/type/index.gohtml:26
Add add_campsite_type function and call it from Go with a proper form This form has an “HTML field”, which is just a <textarea> but “improved” with the use of Automattic’s isolated block editor[0], a repackaged Gutenberg’s editor playground as full-featured multi-instance editor that does not require WordPress. I do not want to use Node to build this huge, over-engineered piece of … software. Therefore, i downloaded the released “browser” package, and added the required React bundle, like i do with HTMx. This will hold until i need a new custom block type; let’s hope i will not need it. [0]: https://github.com/Automattic/isolated-block-editor
2023-08-04 17:59:58 +00:00
msgctxt "header"
Add the list of features for campsite type
2023-10-13 18:30:31 +00:00
msgid "Features"
msgstr "Características"
Replace use of L10NInput with I18nInput for campsite
2024-01-10 20:52:49 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/type/index.gohtml:27
Add the list of features for campsite type
2023-10-13 18:30:31 +00:00
msgctxt "header"
Add campsite type options, mainly for plots
2023-10-06 11:26:01 +00:00
msgid "Options"
msgstr "Opciones"
Add add_campsite_type function and call it from Go with a proper form This form has an “HTML field”, which is just a <textarea> but “improved” with the use of Automattic’s isolated block editor[0], a repackaged Gutenberg’s editor playground as full-featured multi-instance editor that does not require WordPress. I do not want to use Node to build this huge, over-engineered piece of … software. Therefore, i downloaded the released “browser” package, and added the required React bundle, like i do with HTMx. This will hold until i need a new custom block type; let’s hope i will not need it. [0]: https://github.com/Automattic/isolated-block-editor
2023-08-04 17:59:58 +00:00
Replace use of L10NInput with I18nInput for campsite
2024-01-10 20:52:49 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/type/index.gohtml:28
Add the carousel for campsite types I can not reuse the carousel package because these carousels need the campsite site’s slug as a first parameters: i can not have a relation per campsite type, as i do in home and services pages, because the campsite types are added by administration types; even if i had a single relation for slides of home and services pages, these would go in a different relation due to the foreign key to campsite type. What i could reuse, however, is the Slide and SlideEntry types from that package, although i had to export carousel.Translation to be usable from the types package. I should change that to use locale.Translation, but this was the easier option, or i would need to change the queries and templates for carousel package too. Besides that, they work exactly like the slides in home and services pages.
2023-10-12 14:33:45 +00:00
msgctxt "header"
msgid "Carousel"
msgstr "Carrusel"
Replace use of L10NInput with I18nInput for campsite
2024-01-10 20:52:49 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/type/index.gohtml:41
Add the list of features for campsite type
2023-10-13 18:30:31 +00:00
msgctxt "action"
msgid "Edit Features"
msgstr "Editar las características"
Replace use of L10NInput with I18nInput for campsite
2024-01-10 20:52:49 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/type/index.gohtml:44
Add campsite type options, mainly for plots
2023-10-06 11:26:01 +00:00
msgctxt "action"
msgid "Edit Options"
msgstr "Editar opciones"
Add internationalization and localization of campsite types I am not happy with the localization interface for admins, but it is the easier that i could think of (for me, i guess), with a separate for each language. I am not at all proud of the use of RecordArray, but i did not see the need to create and register a type just to show the translation links. I might change my mind when i need to add more and more translation links, but only it the current interface remains, which i am not that sure at the moment.
2023-09-12 18:20:23 +00:00
Replace use of L10NInput with I18nInput for campsite
2024-01-10 20:52:49 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/type/index.gohtml:47
Add the carousel for campsite types I can not reuse the carousel package because these carousels need the campsite site’s slug as a first parameters: i can not have a relation per campsite type, as i do in home and services pages, because the campsite types are added by administration types; even if i had a single relation for slides of home and services pages, these would go in a different relation due to the foreign key to campsite type. What i could reuse, however, is the Slide and SlideEntry types from that package, although i had to export carousel.Translation to be usable from the types package. I should change that to use locale.Translation, but this was the easier option, or i would need to change the queries and templates for carousel package too. Besides that, they work exactly like the slides in home and services pages.
2023-10-12 14:33:45 +00:00
msgctxt "action"
msgid "Edit Carousel"
msgstr "Editar el carrusel"
Replace use of L10NInput with I18nInput for campsite
2024-01-10 20:52:49 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/campsite/type/index.gohtml:56
Add add_campsite_type function and call it from Go with a proper form This form has an “HTML field”, which is just a <textarea> but “improved” with the use of Automattic’s isolated block editor[0], a repackaged Gutenberg’s editor playground as full-featured multi-instance editor that does not require WordPress. I do not want to use Node to build this huge, over-engineered piece of … software. Therefore, i downloaded the released “browser” package, and added the required React bundle, like i do with HTMx. This will hold until i need a new custom block type; let’s hope i will not need it. [0]: https://github.com/Automattic/isolated-block-editor
2023-08-04 17:59:58 +00:00
msgid "No campsite types added yet."
msgstr "No se ha añadido ningún tipo de alojamiento todavía."
Add seasons’ relation, functions, and admin section Seasons have a color to show on the calendar. I need them in HTML format (e.g., #123abc) in order to set as value to `<input type="color">`, but i did not want to save them as text in the database, as integers are better representations of colors—in fact, that’s what the HTML syntax also is: an integer. I think the best would be to create an extension that adds an HTML color type, with functions to convert from many representations (e.g., CSS’ rgb or even color names) to integer and back. However, that’s a lot of work and i can satisfy Camper’s needs with just a couple of functions and a domain. To show the color on the index, at first tried to use a read-only `<input type="color">`, but seems that this type of input can not be read-only and must be disabled instead. However, i do not know whether it makes sense to have a disabled input outside a form “just” to show a color; i suspect it does not. Thus, at the end i use SVG with a single circle, which is better that a 50%-rounded div with a background color, even if the result is the same—SVG **is** intended for showing pictures, which is this case.
2023-08-16 18:15:57 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/season/form.gohtml:8
Add the edit form for services This one has an input to select the icon. It makes no sense to choose an icon only by name, thus a <select> is not appropriate, and had to use a hidden input with a row of button to choose the icon from. This works now only because there are very few icons; we’ll need to choose a different approach when there are many more icons. Since now the icons have to be defined in CSS for both the public and admin sections, i had to split it into a separate file that both sites can use. I considered the option to “include” that CSS with m4, like i do for images in demo.sql, but it made everything too complicated (e.g., having to call make for each change in the CSS), and decided to load that CSS in a separate <link>.
2023-09-25 18:10:33 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/season/form.gohtml:25
Add seasons’ relation, functions, and admin section Seasons have a color to show on the calendar. I need them in HTML format (e.g., #123abc) in order to set as value to `<input type="color">`, but i did not want to save them as text in the database, as integers are better representations of colors—in fact, that’s what the HTML syntax also is: an integer. I think the best would be to create an extension that adds an HTML color type, with functions to convert from many representations (e.g., CSS’ rgb or even color names) to integer and back. However, that’s a lot of work and i can satisfy Camper’s needs with just a couple of functions and a domain. To show the color on the index, at first tried to use a read-only `<input type="color">`, but seems that this type of input can not be read-only and must be disabled instead. However, i do not know whether it makes sense to have a disabled input outside a form “just” to show a color; i suspect it does not. Thus, at the end i use SVG with a single circle, which is better that a 50%-rounded div with a background color, even if the result is the same—SVG **is** intended for showing pictures, which is this case.
2023-08-16 18:15:57 +00:00
msgctxt "title"
msgid "Edit Season"
msgstr "Edición de temporada"
#: web/templates/admin/season/form.gohtml:10
Add the edit form for services This one has an input to select the icon. It makes no sense to choose an icon only by name, thus a <select> is not appropriate, and had to use a hidden input with a row of button to choose the icon from. This works now only because there are very few icons; we’ll need to choose a different approach when there are many more icons. Since now the icons have to be defined in CSS for both the public and admin sections, i had to split it into a separate file that both sites can use. I considered the option to “include” that CSS with m4, like i do for images in demo.sql, but it made everything too complicated (e.g., having to call make for each change in the CSS), and decided to load that CSS in a separate <link>.
2023-09-25 18:10:33 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/season/form.gohtml:27
Add seasons’ relation, functions, and admin section Seasons have a color to show on the calendar. I need them in HTML format (e.g., #123abc) in order to set as value to `<input type="color">`, but i did not want to save them as text in the database, as integers are better representations of colors—in fact, that’s what the HTML syntax also is: an integer. I think the best would be to create an extension that adds an HTML color type, with functions to convert from many representations (e.g., CSS’ rgb or even color names) to integer and back. However, that’s a lot of work and i can satisfy Camper’s needs with just a couple of functions and a domain. To show the color on the index, at first tried to use a read-only `<input type="color">`, but seems that this type of input can not be read-only and must be disabled instead. However, i do not know whether it makes sense to have a disabled input outside a form “just” to show a color; i suspect it does not. Thus, at the end i use SVG with a single circle, which is better that a 50%-rounded div with a background color, even if the result is the same—SVG **is** intended for showing pictures, which is this case.
2023-08-16 18:15:57 +00:00
msgctxt "title"
msgid "New Season"
msgstr "Nueva temporada"
Add the edit form for services This one has an input to select the icon. It makes no sense to choose an icon only by name, thus a <select> is not appropriate, and had to use a hidden input with a row of button to choose the icon from. This works now only because there are very few icons; we’ll need to choose a different approach when there are many more icons. Since now the icons have to be defined in CSS for both the public and admin sections, i had to split it into a separate file that both sites can use. I considered the option to “include” that CSS with m4, like i do for images in demo.sql, but it made everything too complicated (e.g., having to call make for each change in the CSS), and decided to load that CSS in a separate <link>.
2023-09-25 18:10:33 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/season/form.gohtml:37
Add user-defined order to campsite types, options, seasons and carousels I use Sortable, exactly like HTMx’s sorting example does[0]. Had to export the slug or ID of some entries to be able to add it in the hidden input. For forms that use ID instead of slug, had to use an input name other than “id” because otherwise the swap would fail due to bug #1496[1]. It is apparently fixed in a recent version of HTMx, but i did not want to update for fear of behaviour changes. [0]: https://htmx.org/examples/sortable/ [1]: https://github.com/bigskysoftware/htmx/issues/1496
2023-12-20 18:52:14 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/season/index.gohtml:28
Add seasons’ relation, functions, and admin section Seasons have a color to show on the calendar. I need them in HTML format (e.g., #123abc) in order to set as value to `<input type="color">`, but i did not want to save them as text in the database, as integers are better representations of colors—in fact, that’s what the HTML syntax also is: an integer. I think the best would be to create an extension that adds an HTML color type, with functions to convert from many representations (e.g., CSS’ rgb or even color names) to integer and back. However, that’s a lot of work and i can satisfy Camper’s needs with just a couple of functions and a domain. To show the color on the index, at first tried to use a read-only `<input type="color">`, but seems that this type of input can not be read-only and must be disabled instead. However, i do not know whether it makes sense to have a disabled input outside a form “just” to show a color; i suspect it does not. Thus, at the end i use SVG with a single circle, which is better that a 50%-rounded div with a background color, even if the result is the same—SVG **is** intended for showing pictures, which is this case.
2023-08-16 18:15:57 +00:00
msgctxt "season"
msgid "Active"
msgstr "Activa"
Add the edit form for services This one has an input to select the icon. It makes no sense to choose an icon only by name, thus a <select> is not appropriate, and had to use a hidden input with a row of button to choose the icon from. This works now only because there are very few icons; we’ll need to choose a different approach when there are many more icons. Since now the icons have to be defined in CSS for both the public and admin sections, i had to split it into a separate file that both sites can use. I considered the option to “include” that CSS with m4, like i do for images in demo.sql, but it made everything too complicated (e.g., having to call make for each change in the CSS), and decided to load that CSS in a separate <link>.
2023-09-25 18:10:33 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/season/form.gohtml:54
Add seasons’ relation, functions, and admin section Seasons have a color to show on the calendar. I need them in HTML format (e.g., #123abc) in order to set as value to `<input type="color">`, but i did not want to save them as text in the database, as integers are better representations of colors—in fact, that’s what the HTML syntax also is: an integer. I think the best would be to create an extension that adds an HTML color type, with functions to convert from many representations (e.g., CSS’ rgb or even color names) to integer and back. However, that’s a lot of work and i can satisfy Camper’s needs with just a couple of functions and a domain. To show the color on the index, at first tried to use a read-only `<input type="color">`, but seems that this type of input can not be read-only and must be disabled instead. However, i do not know whether it makes sense to have a disabled input outside a form “just” to show a color; i suspect it does not. Thus, at the end i use SVG with a single circle, which is better that a 50%-rounded div with a background color, even if the result is the same—SVG **is** intended for showing pictures, which is this case.
2023-08-16 18:15:57 +00:00
msgctxt "input"
msgid "Color"
msgstr "Color"
#: web/templates/admin/season/index.gohtml:6
Add the edit form for services This one has an input to select the icon. It makes no sense to choose an icon only by name, thus a <select> is not appropriate, and had to use a hidden input with a row of button to choose the icon from. This works now only because there are very few icons; we’ll need to choose a different approach when there are many more icons. Since now the icons have to be defined in CSS for both the public and admin sections, i had to split it into a separate file that both sites can use. I considered the option to “include” that CSS with m4, like i do for images in demo.sql, but it made everything too complicated (e.g., having to call make for each change in the CSS), and decided to load that CSS in a separate <link>.
2023-09-25 18:10:33 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/season/index.gohtml:12
Replace contact page with location Customer does not want a contact page, but a page where they can write the direction on how to reach the campground, with a Google map embed instead of using Leaflet, because Google Maps shows the reviews right in the map. That means i had to replace the GPS locations with XML fields for the customer to write. In all four languages. This time i tried a translation approach inspired by PrestaShop: instead of opening a new page for each language, i have all languages in the same page and use AlpineJS to show just a single language. It is far easier to write the translations, even though you do not have the source text visible, specially in this section that there is no place for me to put the language links.
2023-12-21 20:17:04 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/layout.gohtml:48
Add seasons’ relation, functions, and admin section Seasons have a color to show on the calendar. I need them in HTML format (e.g., #123abc) in order to set as value to `<input type="color">`, but i did not want to save them as text in the database, as integers are better representations of colors—in fact, that’s what the HTML syntax also is: an integer. I think the best would be to create an extension that adds an HTML color type, with functions to convert from many representations (e.g., CSS’ rgb or even color names) to integer and back. However, that’s a lot of work and i can satisfy Camper’s needs with just a couple of functions and a domain. To show the color on the index, at first tried to use a read-only `<input type="color">`, but seems that this type of input can not be read-only and must be disabled instead. However, i do not know whether it makes sense to have a disabled input outside a form “just” to show a color; i suspect it does not. Thus, at the end i use SVG with a single circle, which is better that a 50%-rounded div with a background color, even if the result is the same—SVG **is** intended for showing pictures, which is this case.
2023-08-16 18:15:57 +00:00
msgctxt "title"
msgid "Seasons"
msgstr "Temporadas"
Add the edit form for services This one has an input to select the icon. It makes no sense to choose an icon only by name, thus a <select> is not appropriate, and had to use a hidden input with a row of button to choose the icon from. This works now only because there are very few icons; we’ll need to choose a different approach when there are many more icons. Since now the icons have to be defined in CSS for both the public and admin sections, i had to split it into a separate file that both sites can use. I considered the option to “include” that CSS with m4, like i do for images in demo.sql, but it made everything too complicated (e.g., having to call make for each change in the CSS), and decided to load that CSS in a separate <link>.
2023-09-25 18:10:33 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/season/index.gohtml:11
Add seasons’ relation, functions, and admin section Seasons have a color to show on the calendar. I need them in HTML format (e.g., #123abc) in order to set as value to `<input type="color">`, but i did not want to save them as text in the database, as integers are better representations of colors—in fact, that’s what the HTML syntax also is: an integer. I think the best would be to create an extension that adds an HTML color type, with functions to convert from many representations (e.g., CSS’ rgb or even color names) to integer and back. However, that’s a lot of work and i can satisfy Camper’s needs with just a couple of functions and a domain. To show the color on the index, at first tried to use a read-only `<input type="color">`, but seems that this type of input can not be read-only and must be disabled instead. However, i do not know whether it makes sense to have a disabled input outside a form “just” to show a color; i suspect it does not. Thus, at the end i use SVG with a single circle, which is better that a 50%-rounded div with a background color, even if the result is the same—SVG **is** intended for showing pictures, which is this case.
2023-08-16 18:15:57 +00:00
msgctxt "action"
msgid "Add Season"
msgstr "Añadir temporada"
Add user-defined order to campsite types, options, seasons and carousels I use Sortable, exactly like HTMx’s sorting example does[0]. Had to export the slug or ID of some entries to be able to add it in the hidden input. For forms that use ID instead of slug, had to use an input name other than “id” because otherwise the swap would fail due to bug #1496[1]. It is apparently fixed in a recent version of HTMx, but i did not want to update for fear of behaviour changes. [0]: https://htmx.org/examples/sortable/ [1]: https://github.com/bigskysoftware/htmx/issues/1496
2023-12-20 18:52:14 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/season/index.gohtml:25
Add seasons’ relation, functions, and admin section Seasons have a color to show on the calendar. I need them in HTML format (e.g., #123abc) in order to set as value to `<input type="color">`, but i did not want to save them as text in the database, as integers are better representations of colors—in fact, that’s what the HTML syntax also is: an integer. I think the best would be to create an extension that adds an HTML color type, with functions to convert from many representations (e.g., CSS’ rgb or even color names) to integer and back. However, that’s a lot of work and i can satisfy Camper’s needs with just a couple of functions and a domain. To show the color on the index, at first tried to use a read-only `<input type="color">`, but seems that this type of input can not be read-only and must be disabled instead. However, i do not know whether it makes sense to have a disabled input outside a form “just” to show a color; i suspect it does not. Thus, at the end i use SVG with a single circle, which is better that a 50%-rounded div with a background color, even if the result is the same—SVG **is** intended for showing pictures, which is this case.
2023-08-16 18:15:57 +00:00
msgctxt "header"
msgid "Color"
msgstr "Color"
Replace use of L10NInput with I18nInput for campsite
2024-01-10 20:52:49 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/season/index.gohtml:27
Use I18nInput instead of L10nInput to translate carousels
2024-01-12 18:33:44 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/services/index.gohtml:63
Replace use of L10NInput with I18nInput for campsite
2024-01-10 20:52:49 +00:00
msgctxt "header"
msgid "Translations"
msgstr "Traducciones"
Add user-defined order to campsite types, options, seasons and carousels I use Sortable, exactly like HTMx’s sorting example does[0]. Had to export the slug or ID of some entries to be able to add it in the hidden input. For forms that use ID instead of slug, had to use an input name other than “id” because otherwise the swap would fail due to bug #1496[1]. It is apparently fixed in a recent version of HTMx, but i did not want to update for fear of behaviour changes. [0]: https://htmx.org/examples/sortable/ [1]: https://github.com/bigskysoftware/htmx/issues/1496
2023-12-20 18:52:14 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/season/index.gohtml:56
Add seasons’ relation, functions, and admin section Seasons have a color to show on the calendar. I need them in HTML format (e.g., #123abc) in order to set as value to `<input type="color">`, but i did not want to save them as text in the database, as integers are better representations of colors—in fact, that’s what the HTML syntax also is: an integer. I think the best would be to create an extension that adds an HTML color type, with functions to convert from many representations (e.g., CSS’ rgb or even color names) to integer and back. However, that’s a lot of work and i can satisfy Camper’s needs with just a couple of functions and a domain. To show the color on the index, at first tried to use a read-only `<input type="color">`, but seems that this type of input can not be read-only and must be disabled instead. However, i do not know whether it makes sense to have a disabled input outside a form “just” to show a color; i suspect it does not. Thus, at the end i use SVG with a single circle, which is better that a 50%-rounded div with a background color, even if the result is the same—SVG **is** intended for showing pictures, which is this case.
2023-08-16 18:15:57 +00:00
msgid "No seasons added yet."
msgstr "No se ha añadido ninguna temporada todavía."
Add internationalization and localization to seasons
2023-10-03 19:14:37 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/season/l10n.gohtml:7
#: web/templates/admin/season/l10n.gohtml:14
msgctxt "title"
msgid "Translate Season to %s"
msgstr "Traducción de la temporada a %s"
Use I18nInput instead of L10nInput to translate carousels
2024-01-12 18:33:44 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/season/l10n.gohtml:21
#: web/templates/admin/services/l10n.gohtml:21
#: web/templates/admin/services/l10n.gohtml:33
msgid "Source:"
msgstr "Origen:"
#: web/templates/admin/season/l10n.gohtml:23
#: web/templates/admin/services/l10n.gohtml:23
#: web/templates/admin/services/l10n.gohtml:36
msgctxt "input"
msgid "Translation:"
msgstr "Traducción"
#: web/templates/admin/season/l10n.gohtml:32
#: web/templates/admin/services/l10n.gohtml:45
msgctxt "action"
msgid "Translate"
msgstr "Traducir"
Add max campers and dogs allowed fields to campsite types
2023-09-29 18:17:39 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/season/calendar.gohtml:49
#: web/templates/admin/media/picker.gohtml:61
msgctxt "action"
msgid "Cancel"
msgstr "Cancelar"
Add the payment form to admin Had to change setup_redsys because admins can not read the current encrypt key, thus it is not possible to `set encrypt_key = coalesce(…, encrypt_key)`. Not that it did much sense, anyway, as i was already inside the branch of the if when encrpty_key is null. However, it seems that this also affects in the `on conflict` update. I assume this is because `excluded` is some kind of row of the relation and has the same restrictions.
2023-10-27 14:04:43 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/payment.gohtml:6 web/templates/admin/payment.gohtml:12
Replace contact page with location Customer does not want a contact page, but a page where they can write the direction on how to reach the campground, with a Google map embed instead of using Leaflet, because Google Maps shows the reviews right in the map. That means i had to replace the GPS locations with XML fields for the customer to write. In all four languages. This time i tried a translation approach inspired by PrestaShop: instead of opening a new page for each language, i have all languages in the same page and use AlpineJS to show just a single language. It is far easier to write the translations, even though you do not have the source text visible, specially in this section that there is no place for me to put the language links.
2023-12-21 20:17:04 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/layout.gohtml:39
Add the payment form to admin Had to change setup_redsys because admins can not read the current encrypt key, thus it is not possible to `set encrypt_key = coalesce(…, encrypt_key)`. Not that it did much sense, anyway, as i was already inside the branch of the if when encrpty_key is null. However, it seems that this also affects in the `on conflict` update. I assume this is because `excluded` is some kind of row of the relation and has the same restrictions.
2023-10-27 14:04:43 +00:00
msgctxt "title"
msgid "Payment Settings"
msgstr "Parámetros de pago"
#: web/templates/admin/payment.gohtml:17
msgctxt "input"
msgid "Merchant Code"
msgstr "Código del comercio"
#: web/templates/admin/payment.gohtml:26
msgctxt "input"
msgid "Terminal Number"
msgstr "Número de terminal"
#: web/templates/admin/payment.gohtml:36
msgctxt "input"
msgid "Merchant Key (only if must change it)"
msgstr "Clave del comercio (sólo si se debe cambiar)"
#: web/templates/admin/payment.gohtml:38
msgctxt "input"
msgid "Merchant Key"
msgstr "Clave del comercio"
#: web/templates/admin/payment.gohtml:48
msgctxt "title"
msgid "Environment"
msgstr "Entorno"
#: web/templates/admin/payment.gohtml:55
msgctxt "title"
msgid "Integration"
msgstr "Integración"
Split templates and handlers into admin and public I need to check that the user is an employee (or admin) in administration handlers, but i do not want to do it for each handler, because i am bound to forget it. Thus, i added the /admin sub-path for these resources. The public-facing web is the rest of the resources outside /admin, but for now there is only home, to test whether it works as expected or not. The public-facing web can not relay on the user’s language settings, as the guest user has no way to set that. I would be happy to just use the Accept-Language header for that, but apparently Google does not use that header[0], and they give four alternatives: a country-specific domain, a subdomain with a generic top-level domain (gTLD), subdirectories with a gTLD, or URL parameters (e.g., site.com?loc=de). Of the four, Google does not recommend URL parameters, and the customer is already using subdirectories with the current site, therefor that’s what i have chosen. Google also tells me that it is a very good idea to have links between localized version of the same resources, either with <link> elements, Link HTTP response headers, or a sitemap file[1]; they are all equivalent in the eyes of Google. I have choosen the Link response headers way, because for that i can simply “augment” ResponseHeader to automatically add these headers when the response status is 2xx, otherwise i would need to pass down the original URL path until it reaches the template. Even though Camper is supposed to be a “generic”, multi-company application, i think i will stick to the easiest route and write the templates for just the “first” customer. [0]: https://developers.google.com/search/docs/specialty/international/managing-multi-regional-sites [1]: https://developers.google.com/search/docs/specialty/international/localized-versions
2023-08-05 01:42:37 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/dashboard.gohtml:6
Add management of legal texts
2023-12-22 01:23:18 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/dashboard.gohtml:10 web/templates/admin/layout.gohtml:79
Get user from database based on cookie and serve login if not logged in To get the user from the database i have to set the cookie first, that was already done in database.MustAcquire, but i thought they were too far apart, even thought they are so related. So, the cookie, and thus the role, is set when getting the user, that is actually the first thing to do once the connection is acquired. However, that way the database package has no knowledge of cookies, and the code that sets the cookie and retrieves the user are next to each other. I applied the same logic to the changes of locale.Match: it has not business knowing that the accept language string comes from a request; it only needs the actual string. Also, the TODO comment about getting the user’s locale made no sense, now, because app already knows that locale, so there is no need to pass the user to the locale package. Getting the locale is done after retrieving the user from the database, for the same reason the connection is Acquired as far up as possible: almost every request will need this value, together with the user and the database connection. I am a bit affraid that i will end up with functions that always expect these three values. Maybe i can put the locale inside user, as it is the user’s locale, after all, no matter if it came from the database or the user agent, but connection and user must be separate, i think. We’ll see.
2023-07-25 23:50:39 +00:00
msgctxt "title"
msgid "Dashboard"
msgstr "Panel"
Split templates and handlers into admin and public I need to check that the user is an employee (or admin) in administration handlers, but i do not want to do it for each handler, because i am bound to forget it. Thus, i added the /admin sub-path for these resources. The public-facing web is the rest of the resources outside /admin, but for now there is only home, to test whether it works as expected or not. The public-facing web can not relay on the user’s language settings, as the guest user has no way to set that. I would be happy to just use the Accept-Language header for that, but apparently Google does not use that header[0], and they give four alternatives: a country-specific domain, a subdomain with a generic top-level domain (gTLD), subdirectories with a gTLD, or URL parameters (e.g., site.com?loc=de). Of the four, Google does not recommend URL parameters, and the customer is already using subdirectories with the current site, therefor that’s what i have chosen. Google also tells me that it is a very good idea to have links between localized version of the same resources, either with <link> elements, Link HTTP response headers, or a sitemap file[1]; they are all equivalent in the eyes of Google. I have choosen the Link response headers way, because for that i can simply “augment” ResponseHeader to automatically add these headers when the response status is 2xx, otherwise i would need to pass down the original URL path until it reaches the template. Even though Camper is supposed to be a “generic”, multi-company application, i think i will stick to the easiest route and write the templates for just the “first” customer. [0]: https://developers.google.com/search/docs/specialty/international/managing-multi-regional-sites [1]: https://developers.google.com/search/docs/specialty/international/localized-versions
2023-08-05 01:42:37 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/login.gohtml:6 web/templates/admin/login.gohtml:13
Add the skeleton of the web application It does nothing more than to server a single page that does nothing interesting. This time i do not use a router. Instead, i am trying out a technique i have seen in an article[0] that i have tried in other, smaller, projects and seems to work surprisingly well: it just “cuts off” the URI path by path, passing the request from handler to handler until it finds its way to a handler that actually serves the request. That helps to loosen the coupling between the application and lower handlers, and makes dependencies explicit, because i need to pass the locale, company, etc. down instead of storing them in contexts. Let’s see if i do not regret it on a later date. I also made a lot more packages that in Numerus. In Numerus i actually only have the single pkg package, and it works, kind of, but i notice how i name my methods to avoid clashing instead of using packages for that. That is, instead of pkg.NewApp i now have app.New. Initially i thought that Locale should be inside app, but then there was a circular dependency between app and template. That is why i created a separate package, but now i am wondering if template should be inside app too, but then i would have app.MustRenderTemplate instead of template.MustRender. The CSS is the most bare-bones file i could write because i am focusing in markup right now; Oriol will fill in the file once the application is working. [0]: https://blog.merovius.de/posts/2017-06-18-how-not-to-use-an-http-router/
2023-07-22 22:11:00 +00:00
msgctxt "title"
msgid "Login"
msgstr "Entrada"
Split templates and handlers into admin and public I need to check that the user is an employee (or admin) in administration handlers, but i do not want to do it for each handler, because i am bound to forget it. Thus, i added the /admin sub-path for these resources. The public-facing web is the rest of the resources outside /admin, but for now there is only home, to test whether it works as expected or not. The public-facing web can not relay on the user’s language settings, as the guest user has no way to set that. I would be happy to just use the Accept-Language header for that, but apparently Google does not use that header[0], and they give four alternatives: a country-specific domain, a subdomain with a generic top-level domain (gTLD), subdirectories with a gTLD, or URL parameters (e.g., site.com?loc=de). Of the four, Google does not recommend URL parameters, and the customer is already using subdirectories with the current site, therefor that’s what i have chosen. Google also tells me that it is a very good idea to have links between localized version of the same resources, either with <link> elements, Link HTTP response headers, or a sitemap file[1]; they are all equivalent in the eyes of Google. I have choosen the Link response headers way, because for that i can simply “augment” ResponseHeader to automatically add these headers when the response status is 2xx, otherwise i would need to pass down the original URL path until it reaches the template. Even though Camper is supposed to be a “generic”, multi-company application, i think i will stick to the easiest route and write the templates for just the “first” customer. [0]: https://developers.google.com/search/docs/specialty/international/managing-multi-regional-sites [1]: https://developers.google.com/search/docs/specialty/international/localized-versions
2023-08-05 01:42:37 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/login.gohtml:31 web/templates/admin/profile.gohtml:46
Add the skeleton of the web application It does nothing more than to server a single page that does nothing interesting. This time i do not use a router. Instead, i am trying out a technique i have seen in an article[0] that i have tried in other, smaller, projects and seems to work surprisingly well: it just “cuts off” the URI path by path, passing the request from handler to handler until it finds its way to a handler that actually serves the request. That helps to loosen the coupling between the application and lower handlers, and makes dependencies explicit, because i need to pass the locale, company, etc. down instead of storing them in contexts. Let’s see if i do not regret it on a later date. I also made a lot more packages that in Numerus. In Numerus i actually only have the single pkg package, and it works, kind of, but i notice how i name my methods to avoid clashing instead of using packages for that. That is, instead of pkg.NewApp i now have app.New. Initially i thought that Locale should be inside app, but then there was a circular dependency between app and template. That is why i created a separate package, but now i am wondering if template should be inside app too, but then i would have app.MustRenderTemplate instead of template.MustRender. The CSS is the most bare-bones file i could write because i am focusing in markup right now; Oriol will fill in the file once the application is working. [0]: https://blog.merovius.de/posts/2017-06-18-how-not-to-use-an-http-router/
2023-07-22 22:11:00 +00:00
msgctxt "input"
msgid "Password"
msgstr "Contraseña"
Split templates and handlers into admin and public I need to check that the user is an employee (or admin) in administration handlers, but i do not want to do it for each handler, because i am bound to forget it. Thus, i added the /admin sub-path for these resources. The public-facing web is the rest of the resources outside /admin, but for now there is only home, to test whether it works as expected or not. The public-facing web can not relay on the user’s language settings, as the guest user has no way to set that. I would be happy to just use the Accept-Language header for that, but apparently Google does not use that header[0], and they give four alternatives: a country-specific domain, a subdomain with a generic top-level domain (gTLD), subdirectories with a gTLD, or URL parameters (e.g., site.com?loc=de). Of the four, Google does not recommend URL parameters, and the customer is already using subdirectories with the current site, therefor that’s what i have chosen. Google also tells me that it is a very good idea to have links between localized version of the same resources, either with <link> elements, Link HTTP response headers, or a sitemap file[1]; they are all equivalent in the eyes of Google. I have choosen the Link response headers way, because for that i can simply “augment” ResponseHeader to automatically add these headers when the response status is 2xx, otherwise i would need to pass down the original URL path until it reaches the template. Even though Camper is supposed to be a “generic”, multi-company application, i think i will stick to the easiest route and write the templates for just the “first” customer. [0]: https://developers.google.com/search/docs/specialty/international/managing-multi-regional-sites [1]: https://developers.google.com/search/docs/specialty/international/localized-versions
2023-08-05 01:42:37 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/login.gohtml:40
Add the skeleton of the web application It does nothing more than to server a single page that does nothing interesting. This time i do not use a router. Instead, i am trying out a technique i have seen in an article[0] that i have tried in other, smaller, projects and seems to work surprisingly well: it just “cuts off” the URI path by path, passing the request from handler to handler until it finds its way to a handler that actually serves the request. That helps to loosen the coupling between the application and lower handlers, and makes dependencies explicit, because i need to pass the locale, company, etc. down instead of storing them in contexts. Let’s see if i do not regret it on a later date. I also made a lot more packages that in Numerus. In Numerus i actually only have the single pkg package, and it works, kind of, but i notice how i name my methods to avoid clashing instead of using packages for that. That is, instead of pkg.NewApp i now have app.New. Initially i thought that Locale should be inside app, but then there was a circular dependency between app and template. That is why i created a separate package, but now i am wondering if template should be inside app too, but then i would have app.MustRenderTemplate instead of template.MustRender. The CSS is the most bare-bones file i could write because i am focusing in markup right now; Oriol will fill in the file once the application is working. [0]: https://blog.merovius.de/posts/2017-06-18-how-not-to-use-an-http-router/
2023-07-22 22:11:00 +00:00
msgctxt "action"
msgid "Login"
msgstr "Entrar"
Add the edit form for services This one has an input to select the icon. It makes no sense to choose an icon only by name, thus a <select> is not appropriate, and had to use a hidden input with a row of button to choose the icon from. This works now only because there are very few icons; we’ll need to choose a different approach when there are many more icons. Since now the icons have to be defined in CSS for both the public and admin sections, i had to split it into a separate file that both sites can use. I considered the option to “include” that CSS with m4, like i do for images in demo.sql, but it made everything too complicated (e.g., having to call make for each change in the CSS), and decided to load that CSS in a separate <link>.
2023-09-25 18:10:33 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/services/form.gohtml:8
#: web/templates/admin/services/form.gohtml:25
msgctxt "title"
msgid "Edit Service"
msgstr "Edición de servicio"
#: web/templates/admin/services/form.gohtml:10
#: web/templates/admin/services/form.gohtml:27
msgctxt "title"
msgid "New Service"
msgstr "Nuevo servicio"
Add the services page This page is more or less similar to home, in terms of database: it has a carousel and a list of items; in this case, the definition of campsite services. As i said early, when adding the home carousel, this carousel has its own relation and set of functions to manage slides. They are also duplicated in Go code, but i think i will need to refactor it later to a carousel package or something like that, because both relations have the exact same fields and types, so it makes no sense to have twice the same code. I already did it with the CSS and JavaScript code, mostly because it was easier to replace the `.surroundings div` selector with `.carousel`, and because that way i can have a single template that loads and initializes Slick. There is no UI to create or edit service definitions, although there are the SQL functions, because i have no more time now, and Oriol needs to check that the style is correct for that page.
2023-09-17 01:42:16 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/services/index.gohtml:6
Replace contact page with location Customer does not want a contact page, but a page where they can write the direction on how to reach the campground, with a Google map embed instead of using Leaflet, because Google Maps shows the reviews right in the map. That means i had to replace the GPS locations with XML fields for the customer to write. In all four languages. This time i tried a translation approach inspired by PrestaShop: instead of opening a new page for each language, i have all languages in the same page and use AlpineJS to show just a single language. It is far easier to write the translations, even though you do not have the source text visible, specially in this section that there is no place for me to put the language links.
2023-12-21 20:17:04 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/layout.gohtml:57
Add the services page This page is more or less similar to home, in terms of database: it has a carousel and a list of items; in this case, the definition of campsite services. As i said early, when adding the home carousel, this carousel has its own relation and set of functions to manage slides. They are also duplicated in Go code, but i think i will need to refactor it later to a carousel package or something like that, because both relations have the exact same fields and types, so it makes no sense to have twice the same code. I already did it with the CSS and JavaScript code, mostly because it was easier to replace the `.surroundings div` selector with `.carousel`, and because that way i can have a single template that loads and initializes Slick. There is no UI to create or edit service definitions, although there are the SQL functions, because i have no more time now, and Oriol needs to check that the style is correct for that page.
2023-09-17 01:42:16 +00:00
msgctxt "title"
Manage all media uploads in a single place It made no sense to have a file upload in each form that needs a media, because to reuse an existing media users would need to upload the exact same file again; this is very unusual and unfriendly. A better option is to have a “centralized” media section, where people can upload files there, and then have a picker to select from there. Ideally, there would be an upload option in the picker, but i did not add it yet. I’ve split the content from the media because i want users to have the option to update a media, for instance when they need to upload a reduced or cropped version of the same photo, without an edit they would need to upload the file as a new media and then update all places where the old version was used. And i did not want to trouble people that uploads the same photo twice: without the separate relation, doing so would throw a constraint error. I do not believe there is any security problem to have all companies link their media to the same file, as they were already readable by everyone and could upload the data from a different company to their own; in other words, it is not worse than it was now.
2023-09-20 23:56:44 +00:00
msgid "Services Page"
msgstr "Página de servicios"
Add the services page This page is more or less similar to home, in terms of database: it has a carousel and a list of items; in this case, the definition of campsite services. As i said early, when adding the home carousel, this carousel has its own relation and set of functions to manage slides. They are also duplicated in Go code, but i think i will need to refactor it later to a carousel package or something like that, because both relations have the exact same fields and types, so it makes no sense to have twice the same code. I already did it with the CSS and JavaScript code, mostly because it was easier to replace the `.surroundings div` selector with `.carousel`, and because that way i can have a single template that loads and initializes Slick. There is no UI to create or edit service definitions, although there are the SQL functions, because i have no more time now, and Oriol needs to check that the style is correct for that page.
2023-09-17 01:42:16 +00:00
Add the edit form for services This one has an input to select the icon. It makes no sense to choose an icon only by name, thus a <select> is not appropriate, and had to use a hidden input with a row of button to choose the icon from. This works now only because there are very few icons; we’ll need to choose a different approach when there are many more icons. Since now the icons have to be defined in CSS for both the public and admin sections, i had to split it into a separate file that both sites can use. I considered the option to “include” that CSS with m4, like i do for images in demo.sql, but it made everything too complicated (e.g., having to call make for each change in the CSS), and decided to load that CSS in a separate <link>.
2023-09-25 18:10:33 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/services/index.gohtml:11
#: web/templates/admin/home/index.gohtml:11
Add the services page This page is more or less similar to home, in terms of database: it has a carousel and a list of items; in this case, the definition of campsite services. As i said early, when adding the home carousel, this carousel has its own relation and set of functions to manage slides. They are also duplicated in Go code, but i think i will need to refactor it later to a carousel package or something like that, because both relations have the exact same fields and types, so it makes no sense to have twice the same code. I already did it with the CSS and JavaScript code, mostly because it was easier to replace the `.surroundings div` selector with `.carousel`, and because that way i can have a single template that loads and initializes Slick. There is no UI to create or edit service definitions, although there are the SQL functions, because i have no more time now, and Oriol needs to check that the style is correct for that page.
2023-09-17 01:42:16 +00:00
msgctxt "title"
msgid "Carousel"
msgstr "Carrusel"
Use I18nInput instead of L10nInput to translate carousels
2024-01-12 18:33:44 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/services/index.gohtml:57
Add the new service form
2023-09-26 14:51:35 +00:00
msgctxt "action"
msgid "Add service"
msgstr "Añadir servicio"
Use I18nInput instead of L10nInput to translate carousels
2024-01-12 18:33:44 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/services/index.gohtml:62
Add the edit form for services This one has an input to select the icon. It makes no sense to choose an icon only by name, thus a <select> is not appropriate, and had to use a hidden input with a row of button to choose the icon from. This works now only because there are very few icons; we’ll need to choose a different approach when there are many more icons. Since now the icons have to be defined in CSS for both the public and admin sections, i had to split it into a separate file that both sites can use. I considered the option to “include” that CSS with m4, like i do for images in demo.sql, but it made everything too complicated (e.g., having to call make for each change in the CSS), and decided to load that CSS in a separate <link>.
2023-09-25 18:10:33 +00:00
msgctxt "header"
msgid "Service"
msgstr "Servicio"
Use I18nInput instead of L10nInput to translate carousels
2024-01-12 18:33:44 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/services/index.gohtml:68
Add a confirmation message for delete actions, except for session I do not like confirmation messages: they question user’s actions, and in general it is better to offer an undo option afterward. However, undo is harder to implement, and currently i do not have time to do this. The delete for the session is different because the only repercussion would be to log in again; the user is not in danger of losing any data whatsoever.
2023-09-26 15:00:22 +00:00
msgid "Are you sure you wish to delete this service?"
msgstr "¿Estáis seguro de querer borrar este servicio?"
Use I18nInput instead of L10nInput to translate carousels
2024-01-12 18:33:44 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/services/index.gohtml:91
Add the edit form for services This one has an input to select the icon. It makes no sense to choose an icon only by name, thus a <select> is not appropriate, and had to use a hidden input with a row of button to choose the icon from. This works now only because there are very few icons; we’ll need to choose a different approach when there are many more icons. Since now the icons have to be defined in CSS for both the public and admin sections, i had to split it into a separate file that both sites can use. I considered the option to “include” that CSS with m4, like i do for images in demo.sql, but it made everything too complicated (e.g., having to call make for each change in the CSS), and decided to load that CSS in a separate <link>.
2023-09-25 18:10:33 +00:00
msgid "No services added yet."
msgstr "No se ha añadido ningún servicio todavía."
#: web/templates/admin/services/l10n.gohtml:7
#: web/templates/admin/services/l10n.gohtml:14
msgctxt "title"
msgid "Translate Service to %s"
msgstr "Traducción del servicio a %s"
Split templates and handlers into admin and public I need to check that the user is an employee (or admin) in administration handlers, but i do not want to do it for each handler, because i am bound to forget it. Thus, i added the /admin sub-path for these resources. The public-facing web is the rest of the resources outside /admin, but for now there is only home, to test whether it works as expected or not. The public-facing web can not relay on the user’s language settings, as the guest user has no way to set that. I would be happy to just use the Accept-Language header for that, but apparently Google does not use that header[0], and they give four alternatives: a country-specific domain, a subdomain with a generic top-level domain (gTLD), subdirectories with a gTLD, or URL parameters (e.g., site.com?loc=de). Of the four, Google does not recommend URL parameters, and the customer is already using subdirectories with the current site, therefor that’s what i have chosen. Google also tells me that it is a very good idea to have links between localized version of the same resources, either with <link> elements, Link HTTP response headers, or a sitemap file[1]; they are all equivalent in the eyes of Google. I have choosen the Link response headers way, because for that i can simply “augment” ResponseHeader to automatically add these headers when the response status is 2xx, otherwise i would need to pass down the original URL path until it reaches the template. Even though Camper is supposed to be a “generic”, multi-company application, i think i will stick to the easiest route and write the templates for just the “first” customer. [0]: https://developers.google.com/search/docs/specialty/international/managing-multi-regional-sites [1]: https://developers.google.com/search/docs/specialty/international/localized-versions
2023-08-05 01:42:37 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/profile.gohtml:6 web/templates/admin/profile.gohtml:12
Replace contact page with location Customer does not want a contact page, but a page where they can write the direction on how to reach the campground, with a Google map embed instead of using Leaflet, because Google Maps shows the reviews right in the map. That means i had to replace the GPS locations with XML fields for the customer to write. In all four languages. This time i tried a translation approach inspired by PrestaShop: instead of opening a new page for each language, i have all languages in the same page and use AlpineJS to show just a single language. It is far easier to write the translations, even though you do not have the source text visible, specially in this section that there is no place for me to put the language links.
2023-12-21 20:17:04 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/layout.gohtml:32
Add profile form, inside a user menu This is the first form that uses HTMx, and can not return a 400 error code because otherwise HTMx does not render the content. Since now there are pages that do not render the whole html, with header and body, i need a different layout for these, and moved the common code to handle forms and such a new template file that both layouts can use. I also need the request in template.MustRender to check which layout i should use. Closes #7.
2023-07-26 18:46:09 +00:00
msgctxt "title"
msgid "Profile"
msgstr "Perfil"
Split templates and handlers into admin and public I need to check that the user is an employee (or admin) in administration handlers, but i do not want to do it for each handler, because i am bound to forget it. Thus, i added the /admin sub-path for these resources. The public-facing web is the rest of the resources outside /admin, but for now there is only home, to test whether it works as expected or not. The public-facing web can not relay on the user’s language settings, as the guest user has no way to set that. I would be happy to just use the Accept-Language header for that, but apparently Google does not use that header[0], and they give four alternatives: a country-specific domain, a subdomain with a generic top-level domain (gTLD), subdirectories with a gTLD, or URL parameters (e.g., site.com?loc=de). Of the four, Google does not recommend URL parameters, and the customer is already using subdirectories with the current site, therefor that’s what i have chosen. Google also tells me that it is a very good idea to have links between localized version of the same resources, either with <link> elements, Link HTTP response headers, or a sitemap file[1]; they are all equivalent in the eyes of Google. I have choosen the Link response headers way, because for that i can simply “augment” ResponseHeader to automatically add these headers when the response status is 2xx, otherwise i would need to pass down the original URL path until it reaches the template. Even though Camper is supposed to be a “generic”, multi-company application, i think i will stick to the easiest route and write the templates for just the “first” customer. [0]: https://developers.google.com/search/docs/specialty/international/managing-multi-regional-sites [1]: https://developers.google.com/search/docs/specialty/international/localized-versions
2023-08-05 01:42:37 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/profile.gohtml:17
Allow users to update their profile images I do not see the profile image as an “integral part” of the user (i.e., no need for constraints), hence i do not want to store it in the database, as would do for the identification image during check-in. By default, i store the avatars in /var/lib/camper/avatars, but it is a variable to allow packagers change this value using the linker. This is also served as a test bed for uploading files to the server, that now has a better interface and uses less resources that what i did to Numerus. Now the profile handler needs to keep a variable to know the path to the avatars’ directory, thus i had to change it to a struct nested in app, much like the fileHandler does. It still has to return the HandlerFunc, however, as this function needs to close over the user and connection variables. Part of #7.
2023-07-28 18:15:09 +00:00
msgctxt "inut"
msgid "Profile Image"
msgstr "Imagen del perfil"
Split templates and handlers into admin and public I need to check that the user is an employee (or admin) in administration handlers, but i do not want to do it for each handler, because i am bound to forget it. Thus, i added the /admin sub-path for these resources. The public-facing web is the rest of the resources outside /admin, but for now there is only home, to test whether it works as expected or not. The public-facing web can not relay on the user’s language settings, as the guest user has no way to set that. I would be happy to just use the Accept-Language header for that, but apparently Google does not use that header[0], and they give four alternatives: a country-specific domain, a subdomain with a generic top-level domain (gTLD), subdirectories with a gTLD, or URL parameters (e.g., site.com?loc=de). Of the four, Google does not recommend URL parameters, and the customer is already using subdirectories with the current site, therefor that’s what i have chosen. Google also tells me that it is a very good idea to have links between localized version of the same resources, either with <link> elements, Link HTTP response headers, or a sitemap file[1]; they are all equivalent in the eyes of Google. I have choosen the Link response headers way, because for that i can simply “augment” ResponseHeader to automatically add these headers when the response status is 2xx, otherwise i would need to pass down the original URL path until it reaches the template. Even though Camper is supposed to be a “generic”, multi-company application, i think i will stick to the easiest route and write the templates for just the “first” customer. [0]: https://developers.google.com/search/docs/specialty/international/managing-multi-regional-sites [1]: https://developers.google.com/search/docs/specialty/international/localized-versions
2023-08-05 01:42:37 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/profile.gohtml:43
Allow users to update their profile images I do not see the profile image as an “integral part” of the user (i.e., no need for constraints), hence i do not want to store it in the database, as would do for the identification image during check-in. By default, i store the avatars in /var/lib/camper/avatars, but it is a variable to allow packagers change this value using the linker. This is also served as a test bed for uploading files to the server, that now has a better interface and uses less resources that what i did to Numerus. Now the profile handler needs to keep a variable to know the path to the avatars’ directory, thus i had to change it to a struct nested in app, much like the fileHandler does. It still has to return the HandlerFunc, however, as this function needs to close over the user and connection variables. Part of #7.
2023-07-28 18:15:09 +00:00
msgctxt "legend"
msgid "Change password"
msgstr "Cambio de contraseña"
Split templates and handlers into admin and public I need to check that the user is an employee (or admin) in administration handlers, but i do not want to do it for each handler, because i am bound to forget it. Thus, i added the /admin sub-path for these resources. The public-facing web is the rest of the resources outside /admin, but for now there is only home, to test whether it works as expected or not. The public-facing web can not relay on the user’s language settings, as the guest user has no way to set that. I would be happy to just use the Accept-Language header for that, but apparently Google does not use that header[0], and they give four alternatives: a country-specific domain, a subdomain with a generic top-level domain (gTLD), subdirectories with a gTLD, or URL parameters (e.g., site.com?loc=de). Of the four, Google does not recommend URL parameters, and the customer is already using subdirectories with the current site, therefor that’s what i have chosen. Google also tells me that it is a very good idea to have links between localized version of the same resources, either with <link> elements, Link HTTP response headers, or a sitemap file[1]; they are all equivalent in the eyes of Google. I have choosen the Link response headers way, because for that i can simply “augment” ResponseHeader to automatically add these headers when the response status is 2xx, otherwise i would need to pass down the original URL path until it reaches the template. Even though Camper is supposed to be a “generic”, multi-company application, i think i will stick to the easiest route and write the templates for just the “first” customer. [0]: https://developers.google.com/search/docs/specialty/international/managing-multi-regional-sites [1]: https://developers.google.com/search/docs/specialty/international/localized-versions
2023-08-05 01:42:37 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/profile.gohtml:55
Add profile form, inside a user menu This is the first form that uses HTMx, and can not return a 400 error code because otherwise HTMx does not render the content. Since now there are pages that do not render the whole html, with header and body, i need a different layout for these, and moved the common code to handle forms and such a new template file that both layouts can use. I also need the request in template.MustRender to check which layout i should use. Closes #7.
2023-07-26 18:46:09 +00:00
msgctxt "input"
msgid "Password Confirmation"
msgstr "Confirmación de la contraseña"
Split templates and handlers into admin and public I need to check that the user is an employee (or admin) in administration handlers, but i do not want to do it for each handler, because i am bound to forget it. Thus, i added the /admin sub-path for these resources. The public-facing web is the rest of the resources outside /admin, but for now there is only home, to test whether it works as expected or not. The public-facing web can not relay on the user’s language settings, as the guest user has no way to set that. I would be happy to just use the Accept-Language header for that, but apparently Google does not use that header[0], and they give four alternatives: a country-specific domain, a subdomain with a generic top-level domain (gTLD), subdirectories with a gTLD, or URL parameters (e.g., site.com?loc=de). Of the four, Google does not recommend URL parameters, and the customer is already using subdirectories with the current site, therefor that’s what i have chosen. Google also tells me that it is a very good idea to have links between localized version of the same resources, either with <link> elements, Link HTTP response headers, or a sitemap file[1]; they are all equivalent in the eyes of Google. I have choosen the Link response headers way, because for that i can simply “augment” ResponseHeader to automatically add these headers when the response status is 2xx, otherwise i would need to pass down the original URL path until it reaches the template. Even though Camper is supposed to be a “generic”, multi-company application, i think i will stick to the easiest route and write the templates for just the “first” customer. [0]: https://developers.google.com/search/docs/specialty/international/managing-multi-regional-sites [1]: https://developers.google.com/search/docs/specialty/international/localized-versions
2023-08-05 01:42:37 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/profile.gohtml:65
Add profile form, inside a user menu This is the first form that uses HTMx, and can not return a 400 error code because otherwise HTMx does not render the content. Since now there are pages that do not render the whole html, with header and body, i need a different layout for these, and moved the common code to handle forms and such a new template file that both layouts can use. I also need the request in template.MustRender to check which layout i should use. Closes #7.
2023-07-26 18:46:09 +00:00
msgctxt "input"
msgid "Language"
msgstr "Idioma"
Add the form to update company’s tax details It is inside the “user menu” only because this is where Numerus has the same option, although it makes less sense in this case, because Numerus is geared toward individual freelancers while Camper is for companies. But, since it is easy to change afterward, this will do for now. However, it should be only shown to admin users, because regular employees have no UPDATE privilege on the company relation. Thus, the need for a new template function to check if the user is admin. Part of #17.
2023-08-15 20:35:21 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/taxDetails.gohtml:6
Add the edit form for services This one has an input to select the icon. It makes no sense to choose an icon only by name, thus a <select> is not appropriate, and had to use a hidden input with a row of button to choose the icon from. This works now only because there are very few icons; we’ll need to choose a different approach when there are many more icons. Since now the icons have to be defined in CSS for both the public and admin sections, i had to split it into a separate file that both sites can use. I considered the option to “include” that CSS with m4, like i do for images in demo.sql, but it made everything too complicated (e.g., having to call make for each change in the CSS), and decided to load that CSS in a separate <link>.
2023-09-25 18:10:33 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/taxDetails.gohtml:12
Add the form to update company’s tax details It is inside the “user menu” only because this is where Numerus has the same option, although it makes less sense in this case, because Numerus is geared toward individual freelancers while Camper is for companies. But, since it is easy to change afterward, this will do for now. However, it should be only shown to admin users, because regular employees have no UPDATE privilege on the company relation. Thus, the need for a new template function to check if the user is admin. Part of #17.
2023-08-15 20:35:21 +00:00
msgctxt "title"
msgid "Tax Details"
msgstr "Configuración fiscal"
Add the edit form for services This one has an input to select the icon. It makes no sense to choose an icon only by name, thus a <select> is not appropriate, and had to use a hidden input with a row of button to choose the icon from. This works now only because there are very few icons; we’ll need to choose a different approach when there are many more icons. Since now the icons have to be defined in CSS for both the public and admin sections, i had to split it into a separate file that both sites can use. I considered the option to “include” that CSS with m4, like i do for images in demo.sql, but it made everything too complicated (e.g., having to call make for each change in the CSS), and decided to load that CSS in a separate <link>.
2023-09-25 18:10:33 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/taxDetails.gohtml:17
#: web/templates/admin/taxDetails.gohtml:58
Add the form to update company’s tax details It is inside the “user menu” only because this is where Numerus has the same option, although it makes less sense in this case, because Numerus is geared toward individual freelancers while Camper is for companies. But, since it is easy to change afterward, this will do for now. However, it should be only shown to admin users, because regular employees have no UPDATE privilege on the company relation. Thus, the need for a new template function to check if the user is admin. Part of #17.
2023-08-15 20:35:21 +00:00
msgctxt "input"
msgid "Business Name"
msgstr "Nombre de empresa"
Add the edit form for services This one has an input to select the icon. It makes no sense to choose an icon only by name, thus a <select> is not appropriate, and had to use a hidden input with a row of button to choose the icon from. This works now only because there are very few icons; we’ll need to choose a different approach when there are many more icons. Since now the icons have to be defined in CSS for both the public and admin sections, i had to split it into a separate file that both sites can use. I considered the option to “include” that CSS with m4, like i do for images in demo.sql, but it made everything too complicated (e.g., having to call make for each change in the CSS), and decided to load that CSS in a separate <link>.
2023-09-25 18:10:33 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/taxDetails.gohtml:26
Add the form to update company’s tax details It is inside the “user menu” only because this is where Numerus has the same option, although it makes less sense in this case, because Numerus is geared toward individual freelancers while Camper is for companies. But, since it is easy to change afterward, this will do for now. However, it should be only shown to admin users, because regular employees have no UPDATE privilege on the company relation. Thus, the need for a new template function to check if the user is admin. Part of #17.
2023-08-15 20:35:21 +00:00
msgctxt "input"
msgid "VAT Number"
msgstr "NIF"
Add the edit form for services This one has an input to select the icon. It makes no sense to choose an icon only by name, thus a <select> is not appropriate, and had to use a hidden input with a row of button to choose the icon from. This works now only because there are very few icons; we’ll need to choose a different approach when there are many more icons. Since now the icons have to be defined in CSS for both the public and admin sections, i had to split it into a separate file that both sites can use. I considered the option to “include” that CSS with m4, like i do for images in demo.sql, but it made everything too complicated (e.g., having to call make for each change in the CSS), and decided to load that CSS in a separate <link>.
2023-09-25 18:10:33 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/taxDetails.gohtml:34
Add the form to update company’s tax details It is inside the “user menu” only because this is where Numerus has the same option, although it makes less sense in this case, because Numerus is geared toward individual freelancers while Camper is for companies. But, since it is easy to change afterward, this will do for now. However, it should be only shown to admin users, because regular employees have no UPDATE privilege on the company relation. Thus, the need for a new template function to check if the user is admin. Part of #17.
2023-08-15 20:35:21 +00:00
msgctxt "input"
msgid "Trade Name"
msgstr "Nombre comercial"
Add the edit form for services This one has an input to select the icon. It makes no sense to choose an icon only by name, thus a <select> is not appropriate, and had to use a hidden input with a row of button to choose the icon from. This works now only because there are very few icons; we’ll need to choose a different approach when there are many more icons. Since now the icons have to be defined in CSS for both the public and admin sections, i had to split it into a separate file that both sites can use. I considered the option to “include” that CSS with m4, like i do for images in demo.sql, but it made everything too complicated (e.g., having to call make for each change in the CSS), and decided to load that CSS in a separate <link>.
2023-09-25 18:10:33 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/taxDetails.gohtml:66
Add the form to update company’s tax details It is inside the “user menu” only because this is where Numerus has the same option, although it makes less sense in this case, because Numerus is geared toward individual freelancers while Camper is for companies. But, since it is easy to change afterward, this will do for now. However, it should be only shown to admin users, because regular employees have no UPDATE privilege on the company relation. Thus, the need for a new template function to check if the user is admin. Part of #17.
2023-08-15 20:35:21 +00:00
msgctxt "input"
msgid "Address"
msgstr "Dirección"
Add the edit form for services This one has an input to select the icon. It makes no sense to choose an icon only by name, thus a <select> is not appropriate, and had to use a hidden input with a row of button to choose the icon from. This works now only because there are very few icons; we’ll need to choose a different approach when there are many more icons. Since now the icons have to be defined in CSS for both the public and admin sections, i had to split it into a separate file that both sites can use. I considered the option to “include” that CSS with m4, like i do for images in demo.sql, but it made everything too complicated (e.g., having to call make for each change in the CSS), and decided to load that CSS in a separate <link>.
2023-09-25 18:10:33 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/taxDetails.gohtml:74
Add the form to update company’s tax details It is inside the “user menu” only because this is where Numerus has the same option, although it makes less sense in this case, because Numerus is geared toward individual freelancers while Camper is for companies. But, since it is easy to change afterward, this will do for now. However, it should be only shown to admin users, because regular employees have no UPDATE privilege on the company relation. Thus, the need for a new template function to check if the user is admin. Part of #17.
2023-08-15 20:35:21 +00:00
msgctxt "input"
msgid "City"
msgstr "Población"
Add the edit form for services This one has an input to select the icon. It makes no sense to choose an icon only by name, thus a <select> is not appropriate, and had to use a hidden input with a row of button to choose the icon from. This works now only because there are very few icons; we’ll need to choose a different approach when there are many more icons. Since now the icons have to be defined in CSS for both the public and admin sections, i had to split it into a separate file that both sites can use. I considered the option to “include” that CSS with m4, like i do for images in demo.sql, but it made everything too complicated (e.g., having to call make for each change in the CSS), and decided to load that CSS in a separate <link>.
2023-09-25 18:10:33 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/taxDetails.gohtml:82
Add the form to update company’s tax details It is inside the “user menu” only because this is where Numerus has the same option, although it makes less sense in this case, because Numerus is geared toward individual freelancers while Camper is for companies. But, since it is easy to change afterward, this will do for now. However, it should be only shown to admin users, because regular employees have no UPDATE privilege on the company relation. Thus, the need for a new template function to check if the user is admin. Part of #17.
2023-08-15 20:35:21 +00:00
msgctxt "input"
msgid "Province"
msgstr "Provincia"
Add the edit form for services This one has an input to select the icon. It makes no sense to choose an icon only by name, thus a <select> is not appropriate, and had to use a hidden input with a row of button to choose the icon from. This works now only because there are very few icons; we’ll need to choose a different approach when there are many more icons. Since now the icons have to be defined in CSS for both the public and admin sections, i had to split it into a separate file that both sites can use. I considered the option to “include” that CSS with m4, like i do for images in demo.sql, but it made everything too complicated (e.g., having to call make for each change in the CSS), and decided to load that CSS in a separate <link>.
2023-09-25 18:10:33 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/taxDetails.gohtml:90
Add the form to update company’s tax details It is inside the “user menu” only because this is where Numerus has the same option, although it makes less sense in this case, because Numerus is geared toward individual freelancers while Camper is for companies. But, since it is easy to change afterward, this will do for now. However, it should be only shown to admin users, because regular employees have no UPDATE privilege on the company relation. Thus, the need for a new template function to check if the user is admin. Part of #17.
2023-08-15 20:35:21 +00:00
msgctxt "input"
Add the first draft of the booking and payment forms The form is based on the one in the current website, but in a single page instead of split into many pages; possibly each <fieldset> should be in a separate page/view. The idea is for Oriol to check the design and decide how it would be presented to the user, so i needed something to show him first. I hardcoded the **test** data for the customer’s Redsys account. Is this bad? I hope not, but i am not really, really sure. The data sent to Redsys is just a placeholder because there are booking details that i do not know, like what i have to do with the “teenagers” field or the area preferences, thus i can not yet have a booking relation. Nevertheless, had to generate a random order number up to 12-chars in length or Redsys would refuse the payment, claiming that the order is duplicated. The Redsys package is based on the PHP code provided by Redsys themselves, plus some hints at the implementations from various Go packages that did not know why they were so complicated. Had to grant select on table country to guest in order to show the select with the country options. I have changed the “Postal code” input in taxDetails for “Postcode” because this is the spell that it is used in the current web, i did not see a reason to change it—it is an accepted form—, and i did not want to have inconsistencies between forms.
2023-10-19 19:37:34 +00:00
msgid "Postcode"
Add the form to update company’s tax details It is inside the “user menu” only because this is where Numerus has the same option, although it makes less sense in this case, because Numerus is geared toward individual freelancers while Camper is for companies. But, since it is easy to change afterward, this will do for now. However, it should be only shown to admin users, because regular employees have no UPDATE privilege on the company relation. Thus, the need for a new template function to check if the user is admin. Part of #17.
2023-08-15 20:35:21 +00:00
msgstr "Código postal"
Add the edit form for services This one has an input to select the icon. It makes no sense to choose an icon only by name, thus a <select> is not appropriate, and had to use a hidden input with a row of button to choose the icon from. This works now only because there are very few icons; we’ll need to choose a different approach when there are many more icons. Since now the icons have to be defined in CSS for both the public and admin sections, i had to split it into a separate file that both sites can use. I considered the option to “include” that CSS with m4, like i do for images in demo.sql, but it made everything too complicated (e.g., having to call make for each change in the CSS), and decided to load that CSS in a separate <link>.
2023-09-25 18:10:33 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/taxDetails.gohtml:108
Add the form to update company’s tax details It is inside the “user menu” only because this is where Numerus has the same option, although it makes less sense in this case, because Numerus is geared toward individual freelancers while Camper is for companies. But, since it is easy to change afterward, this will do for now. However, it should be only shown to admin users, because regular employees have no UPDATE privilege on the company relation. Thus, the need for a new template function to check if the user is admin. Part of #17.
2023-08-15 20:35:21 +00:00
msgctxt "input"
Add the Catalonia’s Tourism Registry number to company It is required to be displayed on the website of tourism companies of Catalonia.
2023-10-14 19:59:36 +00:00
msgid "RTC number"
msgstr "Número RTC"
#: web/templates/admin/taxDetails.gohtml:116
msgctxt "input"
Add the form to update company’s tax details It is inside the “user menu” only because this is where Numerus has the same option, although it makes less sense in this case, because Numerus is geared toward individual freelancers while Camper is for companies. But, since it is easy to change afterward, this will do for now. However, it should be only shown to admin users, because regular employees have no UPDATE privilege on the company relation. Thus, the need for a new template function to check if the user is admin. Part of #17.
2023-08-15 20:35:21 +00:00
msgid "Currency"
msgstr "Moneda"
Add the Catalonia’s Tourism Registry number to company It is required to be displayed on the website of tourism companies of Catalonia.
2023-10-14 19:59:36 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/taxDetails.gohtml:126
Add the form to update company’s tax details It is inside the “user menu” only because this is where Numerus has the same option, although it makes less sense in this case, because Numerus is geared toward individual freelancers while Camper is for companies. But, since it is easy to change afterward, this will do for now. However, it should be only shown to admin users, because regular employees have no UPDATE privilege on the company relation. Thus, the need for a new template function to check if the user is admin. Part of #17.
2023-08-15 20:35:21 +00:00
msgctxt "input"
msgid "Default Language"
msgstr "Idioma por defecto"
Add the Catalonia’s Tourism Registry number to company It is required to be displayed on the website of tourism companies of Catalonia.
2023-10-14 19:59:36 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/taxDetails.gohtml:136
Add the form to update company’s tax details It is inside the “user menu” only because this is where Numerus has the same option, although it makes less sense in this case, because Numerus is geared toward individual freelancers while Camper is for companies. But, since it is easy to change afterward, this will do for now. However, it should be only shown to admin users, because regular employees have no UPDATE privilege on the company relation. Thus, the need for a new template function to check if the user is admin. Part of #17.
2023-08-15 20:35:21 +00:00
msgctxt "input"
msgid "Invoice Number Format"
msgstr "Formato de número de factura"
Add the Catalonia’s Tourism Registry number to company It is required to be displayed on the website of tourism companies of Catalonia.
2023-10-14 19:59:36 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/taxDetails.gohtml:144
Add the form to update company’s tax details It is inside the “user menu” only because this is where Numerus has the same option, although it makes less sense in this case, because Numerus is geared toward individual freelancers while Camper is for companies. But, since it is easy to change afterward, this will do for now. However, it should be only shown to admin users, because regular employees have no UPDATE privilege on the company relation. Thus, the need for a new template function to check if the user is admin. Part of #17.
2023-08-15 20:35:21 +00:00
msgctxt "input"
msgid "Legal Disclaimer"
msgstr "Nota legal"
Replace contact page with location Customer does not want a contact page, but a page where they can write the direction on how to reach the campground, with a Google map embed instead of using Leaflet, because Google Maps shows the reviews right in the map. That means i had to replace the GPS locations with XML fields for the customer to write. In all four languages. This time i tried a translation approach inspired by PrestaShop: instead of opening a new page for each language, i have all languages in the same page and use AlpineJS to show just a single language. It is far easier to write the translations, even though you do not have the source text visible, specially in this section that there is no place for me to put the language links.
2023-12-21 20:17:04 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/layout.gohtml:28
Add profile form, inside a user menu This is the first form that uses HTMx, and can not return a 400 error code because otherwise HTMx does not render the content. Since now there are pages that do not render the whole html, with header and body, i need a different layout for these, and moved the common code to handle forms and such a new template file that both layouts can use. I also need the request in template.MustRender to check which layout i should use. Closes #7.
2023-07-26 18:46:09 +00:00
msgctxt "title"
msgid "User Menu"
msgstr "Menú de usuario"
Replace contact page with location Customer does not want a contact page, but a page where they can write the direction on how to reach the campground, with a Google map embed instead of using Leaflet, because Google Maps shows the reviews right in the map. That means i had to replace the GPS locations with XML fields for the customer to write. In all four languages. This time i tried a translation approach inspired by PrestaShop: instead of opening a new page for each language, i have all languages in the same page and use AlpineJS to show just a single language. It is far easier to write the translations, even though you do not have the source text visible, specially in this section that there is no place for me to put the language links.
2023-12-21 20:17:04 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/layout.gohtml:36
Add the form to update company’s tax details It is inside the “user menu” only because this is where Numerus has the same option, although it makes less sense in this case, because Numerus is geared toward individual freelancers while Camper is for companies. But, since it is easy to change afterward, this will do for now. However, it should be only shown to admin users, because regular employees have no UPDATE privilege on the company relation. Thus, the need for a new template function to check if the user is admin. Part of #17.
2023-08-15 20:35:21 +00:00
msgctxt "title"
msgid "Company Settings"
msgstr "Parámetros de la empresa"
Replace contact page with location Customer does not want a contact page, but a page where they can write the direction on how to reach the campground, with a Google map embed instead of using Leaflet, because Google Maps shows the reviews right in the map. That means i had to replace the GPS locations with XML fields for the customer to write. In all four languages. This time i tried a translation approach inspired by PrestaShop: instead of opening a new page for each language, i have all languages in the same page and use AlpineJS to show just a single language. It is far easier to write the translations, even though you do not have the source text visible, specially in this section that there is no place for me to put the language links.
2023-12-21 20:17:04 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/layout.gohtml:51
Add the edit form for services This one has an input to select the icon. It makes no sense to choose an icon only by name, thus a <select> is not appropriate, and had to use a hidden input with a row of button to choose the icon from. This works now only because there are very few icons; we’ll need to choose a different approach when there are many more icons. Since now the icons have to be defined in CSS for both the public and admin sections, i had to split it into a separate file that both sites can use. I considered the option to “include” that CSS with m4, like i do for images in demo.sql, but it made everything too complicated (e.g., having to call make for each change in the CSS), and decided to load that CSS in a separate <link>.
2023-09-25 18:10:33 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/media/index.gohtml:6
#: web/templates/admin/media/index.gohtml:11
msgctxt "title"
msgid "Media"
msgstr "Medios"
Add the logout button Conceptually, to logout we have to “delete the session”, thus the best HTTP verb would be `DELETE`. However, there is no way to send a `DELETE` request with a regular HTML form, and it seems that never will be[0]. I could use a POST, optionally with a “method override” technique, but i was planing to use HTMx anyway, so this was as good an opportunity to include it as any. In this application i am not concerned with people not having JavaScript enabled, because it is for a customer that has a known environment, and we do not have much time anyway. Therefore, i opted to forgo progressive enhancement in cases like this: if `DELETE` is needed, use `hx-delete`. Unfortunately, i can not use a <form> with a hidden <input> for the CSRF token, because `DELETE` requests do not have body and the value should be added as query parameters, like a form with GET method, but HTMx does the incorrect thing here: sends the values in the request’s body. That’s why i have to use a custom header and the `hx-header` directive to include the CSRF token. Then, by default HTMx targets the triggered element for swap with the response from the server, but after a logout i want to redirect the user to the login form again. I could set the hx-target to button to replace the whole body, or tell the client to redirect to the new location. I actually do not know which one is “better”. Maybe the hx-target is best because then everything is handled by the client, but in the case of logout, since it is possible that i might want to load scripts only for logged-in users in the future, i opted for the full page reload. However, HTMx does not want to reload a page that return HTTP 401, hence i had to include the GET method to /login in order to return the login form with a response of HTTP 200, which also helps when reloading in the browser after a failed login attempt. I am not worried with the HTTP 401 when attempting to load a page as guest, because this request most probably comes from the browser, not HTMx, and it will show the login form as intended—even though it is not compliant, since it does not return the WWW-Authenticate header, but this is the best i can do given that no cookie-based authentication method has been accepted[1]. [0]: https://www.w3.org/Bugs/Public/show_bug.cgi?id=10671#c16 [1]: https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/id/draft-broyer-http-cookie-auth-00.html
2023-07-26 11:49:47 +00:00
Replace contact page with location Customer does not want a contact page, but a page where they can write the direction on how to reach the campground, with a Google map embed instead of using Leaflet, because Google Maps shows the reviews right in the map. That means i had to replace the GPS locations with XML fields for the customer to write. In all four languages. This time i tried a translation approach inspired by PrestaShop: instead of opening a new page for each language, i have all languages in the same page and use AlpineJS to show just a single language. It is far easier to write the translations, even though you do not have the source text visible, specially in this section that there is no place for me to put the language links.
2023-12-21 20:17:04 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/layout.gohtml:54 web/templates/admin/home/index.gohtml:6
Make home page’s carousel manageable via the database I debated with myself whether to create the home_carousel relation or rather if it would be better to have a single carousel relation for all pages. However, i thought that it would be actually harder to maintain a single relation because i would need an additional column to tell one carrousel from another, and what would that column be? An enum? A foreign key to another relation? home_carousel carries no such issues. I was starting to duplicate logic all over the packages, such as the way to encode media paths or “localization” (l10n) input fields. Therefore, i refactorized them. In the case of media path, i added a function that accepts rows of media, because always need the same columns from the row, and it was yet another repetition if i needed to pass them all the time. Plus, these kind of functions can be called as `table.function`, that make them look like columns from the table; if PostgreSQL implemented virtual generated columns, i would have used that instead. I am not sure whether that media_path function can be immutable. An immutable function is “guaranteed to return the same results given the same arguments forever”, which would be true if the inputs where the hash and the original_filename columns, instead of the whole rows, but i left it as static because i did not know whether PostgreSQL interprets the “same row but with different values” as a different input. That is, whether PostgreSQL’s concept of row is the actual tuple or the space that has a rowid, irrespective of contents; in the latter case, the function can not be immutable. Just to be in the safe side, i left it stable. The home page was starting to grow a bit too much inside the app package, new that it has its own admin handler, and moved it all to a separate package.
2023-09-14 23:05:38 +00:00
msgctxt "title"
Manage all media uploads in a single place It made no sense to have a file upload in each form that needs a media, because to reuse an existing media users would need to upload the exact same file again; this is very unusual and unfriendly. A better option is to have a “centralized” media section, where people can upload files there, and then have a picker to select from there. Ideally, there would be an upload option in the picker, but i did not add it yet. I’ve split the content from the media because i want users to have the option to update a media, for instance when they need to upload a reduced or cropped version of the same photo, without an edit they would need to upload the file as a new media and then update all places where the old version was used. And i did not want to trouble people that uploads the same photo twice: without the separate relation, doing so would throw a constraint error. I do not believe there is any security problem to have all companies link their media to the same file, as they were already readable by everyone and could upload the data from a different company to their own; in other words, it is not worse than it was now.
2023-09-20 23:56:44 +00:00
msgid "Home Page"
msgstr "Página de inicio"
Make home page’s carousel manageable via the database I debated with myself whether to create the home_carousel relation or rather if it would be better to have a single carousel relation for all pages. However, i thought that it would be actually harder to maintain a single relation because i would need an additional column to tell one carrousel from another, and what would that column be? An enum? A foreign key to another relation? home_carousel carries no such issues. I was starting to duplicate logic all over the packages, such as the way to encode media paths or “localization” (l10n) input fields. Therefore, i refactorized them. In the case of media path, i added a function that accepts rows of media, because always need the same columns from the row, and it was yet another repetition if i needed to pass them all the time. Plus, these kind of functions can be called as `table.function`, that make them look like columns from the table; if PostgreSQL implemented virtual generated columns, i would have used that instead. I am not sure whether that media_path function can be immutable. An immutable function is “guaranteed to return the same results given the same arguments forever”, which would be true if the inputs where the hash and the original_filename columns, instead of the whole rows, but i left it as static because i did not know whether PostgreSQL interprets the “same row but with different values” as a different input. That is, whether PostgreSQL’s concept of row is the actual tuple or the space that has a rowid, irrespective of contents; in the latter case, the function can not be immutable. Just to be in the safe side, i left it stable. The home page was starting to grow a bit too much inside the app package, new that it has its own admin handler, and moved it all to a separate package.
2023-09-14 23:05:38 +00:00
Add management of legal texts
2023-12-22 01:23:18 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/layout.gohtml:68
Add the edit form for services This one has an input to select the icon. It makes no sense to choose an icon only by name, thus a <select> is not appropriate, and had to use a hidden input with a row of button to choose the icon from. This works now only because there are very few icons; we’ll need to choose a different approach when there are many more icons. Since now the icons have to be defined in CSS for both the public and admin sections, i had to split it into a separate file that both sites can use. I considered the option to “include” that CSS with m4, like i do for images in demo.sql, but it made everything too complicated (e.g., having to call make for each change in the CSS), and decided to load that CSS in a separate <link>.
2023-09-25 18:10:33 +00:00
msgctxt "action"
msgid "Logout"
msgstr "Salir"
Add the surroundings static page This page is “highly stylized”, with a masonry-like grid, that i did not know how to generate automatically from data defined in PostgreSQL, therefore with Oriol we agreed to have this one as a static page and we will see what we can do if the customer asks to be able to change it. I was a bit undecided on whether the icons in the bottom part of the page should be defined in the CSS or with style="" and CSS variables, like i do for the campsite type in the home page. At first i thought that it should use CSS variables, mostly for coherence: if another section of the web does it for its background image, why no this one. The difference is that the home page is dynamically created from the database, while this page is static and we know what icons we need, thus it makes more sense to move it to the stylesheet file, because then it will be downloaded by user agents that actually want to use it (e.g., browsers, but not Braille terminals).
2023-09-16 22:11:39 +00:00
Add the upload form to the media picker It makes easier to upload new images from the place where we need it, instead of having to go to the media section each time. It was a little messy, this one. First of all, I realized that POSTint to /admin/media/picker to get the new media field was wrong: i was not asking the server to “accept an entity”, but only requesting a new HTML value, just like a GET to /admin/media/upload requests the form to upload a new media, thus here i should do the same, except i needed the query parameters to change the field, which is fine—it is actually a different resource, thus a different URL. Then, i thought that i could not POST the upload to /admin/media, because i returned a different HTML —the media field—, so i reused the recently unused POST to /admin/media/picker to upload that file and return the HTML for the field. It was wrong, because i was not requesting the server to put the file as a subordinate of /admin/media/picker, only /admin/media, but i did not come up with any other solution. Since i had two different upload functions now, i created uploadForm’s Handle method to refactorize the duplicated logic to a single place. Unfortunately, i did not work as i expected because uploadForm’s and mediaPicker’s MustRender methods are different, and mediaPicker has to embed uploadForm to render the form in the picker. That made me change Handle’s output to a boolean and error in order for the HTTP handler function know when to render the form with the error messages with the proper MustRender handler. However, I saw the opportunity of reusing that Handler method for editMedia, that was doing mostly the same job, but had to call a different Validate than uploadForm’s, because editMedia does not require the uploaded file. That’s when i realized that i could use an interface and that this interface could be reused not only within media but throughout the application, and added HandleMultipart in form. Had to create a different interface for multipart forms because they need different parameters in Parse that non-multipart form, when i add that interface, hence had to also change Parse to ParseForm to account for the difference in signature; not a big deal. After all that, i realized that i **could** POST to /admin/media in both cases, because i always return “an HTML entity”, it just happens that for the media section it is empty with a redirect, and for the picker is the field. That made the whole Handle method a bit redundant, but i left it nevertheless, as i find it slightly easier to read the uploadMedia function now.
2023-09-21 23:40:22 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/media/picker.gohtml:8
Manage all media uploads in a single place It made no sense to have a file upload in each form that needs a media, because to reuse an existing media users would need to upload the exact same file again; this is very unusual and unfriendly. A better option is to have a “centralized” media section, where people can upload files there, and then have a picker to select from there. Ideally, there would be an upload option in the picker, but i did not add it yet. I’ve split the content from the media because i want users to have the option to update a media, for instance when they need to upload a reduced or cropped version of the same photo, without an edit they would need to upload the file as a new media and then update all places where the old version was used. And i did not want to trouble people that uploads the same photo twice: without the separate relation, doing so would throw a constraint error. I do not believe there is any security problem to have all companies link their media to the same file, as they were already readable by everyone and could upload the data from a different company to their own; in other words, it is not worse than it was now.
2023-09-20 23:56:44 +00:00
msgctxt "title"
msgid "Media Picker"
msgstr "Selector de medio"
Add the surroundings static page This page is “highly stylized”, with a masonry-like grid, that i did not know how to generate automatically from data defined in PostgreSQL, therefore with Oriol we agreed to have this one as a static page and we will see what we can do if the customer asks to be able to change it. I was a bit undecided on whether the icons in the bottom part of the page should be defined in the CSS or with style="" and CSS variables, like i do for the campsite type in the home page. At first i thought that it should use CSS variables, mostly for coherence: if another section of the web does it for its background image, why no this one. The difference is that the home page is dynamically created from the database, while this page is static and we know what icons we need, thus it makes more sense to move it to the stylesheet file, because then it will be downloaded by user agents that actually want to use it (e.g., browsers, but not Braille terminals).
2023-09-16 22:11:39 +00:00
Add the upload form to the media picker It makes easier to upload new images from the place where we need it, instead of having to go to the media section each time. It was a little messy, this one. First of all, I realized that POSTint to /admin/media/picker to get the new media field was wrong: i was not asking the server to “accept an entity”, but only requesting a new HTML value, just like a GET to /admin/media/upload requests the form to upload a new media, thus here i should do the same, except i needed the query parameters to change the field, which is fine—it is actually a different resource, thus a different URL. Then, i thought that i could not POST the upload to /admin/media, because i returned a different HTML —the media field—, so i reused the recently unused POST to /admin/media/picker to upload that file and return the HTML for the field. It was wrong, because i was not requesting the server to put the file as a subordinate of /admin/media/picker, only /admin/media, but i did not come up with any other solution. Since i had two different upload functions now, i created uploadForm’s Handle method to refactorize the duplicated logic to a single place. Unfortunately, i did not work as i expected because uploadForm’s and mediaPicker’s MustRender methods are different, and mediaPicker has to embed uploadForm to render the form in the picker. That made me change Handle’s output to a boolean and error in order for the HTTP handler function know when to render the form with the error messages with the proper MustRender handler. However, I saw the opportunity of reusing that Handler method for editMedia, that was doing mostly the same job, but had to call a different Validate than uploadForm’s, because editMedia does not require the uploaded file. That’s when i realized that i could use an interface and that this interface could be reused not only within media but throughout the application, and added HandleMultipart in form. Had to create a different interface for multipart forms because they need different parameters in Parse that non-multipart form, when i add that interface, hence had to also change Parse to ParseForm to account for the difference in signature; not a big deal. After all that, i realized that i **could** POST to /admin/media in both cases, because i always return “an HTML entity”, it just happens that for the media section it is empty with a redirect, and for the picker is the field. That made the whole Handle method a bit redundant, but i left it nevertheless, as i find it slightly easier to read the uploadMedia function now.
2023-09-21 23:40:22 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/media/picker.gohtml:19
msgctxt "title"
msgid "Upload New Media"
msgstr "Subida de un nuevo medio"
#: web/templates/admin/media/picker.gohtml:22
Add the edit form for services This one has an input to select the icon. It makes no sense to choose an icon only by name, thus a <select> is not appropriate, and had to use a hidden input with a row of button to choose the icon from. This works now only because there are very few icons; we’ll need to choose a different approach when there are many more icons. Since now the icons have to be defined in CSS for both the public and admin sections, i had to split it into a separate file that both sites can use. I considered the option to “include” that CSS with m4, like i do for images in demo.sql, but it made everything too complicated (e.g., having to call make for each change in the CSS), and decided to load that CSS in a separate <link>.
2023-09-25 18:10:33 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/media/upload.gohtml:17
Add the upload form to the media picker It makes easier to upload new images from the place where we need it, instead of having to go to the media section each time. It was a little messy, this one. First of all, I realized that POSTint to /admin/media/picker to get the new media field was wrong: i was not asking the server to “accept an entity”, but only requesting a new HTML value, just like a GET to /admin/media/upload requests the form to upload a new media, thus here i should do the same, except i needed the query parameters to change the field, which is fine—it is actually a different resource, thus a different URL. Then, i thought that i could not POST the upload to /admin/media, because i returned a different HTML —the media field—, so i reused the recently unused POST to /admin/media/picker to upload that file and return the HTML for the field. It was wrong, because i was not requesting the server to put the file as a subordinate of /admin/media/picker, only /admin/media, but i did not come up with any other solution. Since i had two different upload functions now, i created uploadForm’s Handle method to refactorize the duplicated logic to a single place. Unfortunately, i did not work as i expected because uploadForm’s and mediaPicker’s MustRender methods are different, and mediaPicker has to embed uploadForm to render the form in the picker. That made me change Handle’s output to a boolean and error in order for the HTTP handler function know when to render the form with the error messages with the proper MustRender handler. However, I saw the opportunity of reusing that Handler method for editMedia, that was doing mostly the same job, but had to call a different Validate than uploadForm’s, because editMedia does not require the uploaded file. That’s when i realized that i could use an interface and that this interface could be reused not only within media but throughout the application, and added HandleMultipart in form. Had to create a different interface for multipart forms because they need different parameters in Parse that non-multipart form, when i add that interface, hence had to also change Parse to ParseForm to account for the difference in signature; not a big deal. After all that, i realized that i **could** POST to /admin/media in both cases, because i always return “an HTML entity”, it just happens that for the media section it is empty with a redirect, and for the picker is the field. That made the whole Handle method a bit redundant, but i left it nevertheless, as i find it slightly easier to read the uploadMedia function now.
2023-09-21 23:40:22 +00:00
msgctxt "input"
msgid "File"
msgstr "Archivo"
Manage all media uploads in a single place It made no sense to have a file upload in each form that needs a media, because to reuse an existing media users would need to upload the exact same file again; this is very unusual and unfriendly. A better option is to have a “centralized” media section, where people can upload files there, and then have a picker to select from there. Ideally, there would be an upload option in the picker, but i did not add it yet. I’ve split the content from the media because i want users to have the option to update a media, for instance when they need to upload a reduced or cropped version of the same photo, without an edit they would need to upload the file as a new media and then update all places where the old version was used. And i did not want to trouble people that uploads the same photo twice: without the separate relation, doing so would throw a constraint error. I do not believe there is any security problem to have all companies link their media to the same file, as they were already readable by everyone and could upload the data from a different company to their own; in other words, it is not worse than it was now.
2023-09-20 23:56:44 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/media/picker.gohtml:26
Add the edit form for services This one has an input to select the icon. It makes no sense to choose an icon only by name, thus a <select> is not appropriate, and had to use a hidden input with a row of button to choose the icon from. This works now only because there are very few icons; we’ll need to choose a different approach when there are many more icons. Since now the icons have to be defined in CSS for both the public and admin sections, i had to split it into a separate file that both sites can use. I considered the option to “include” that CSS with m4, like i do for images in demo.sql, but it made everything too complicated (e.g., having to call make for each change in the CSS), and decided to load that CSS in a separate <link>.
2023-09-25 18:10:33 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/media/form.gohtml:22
#: web/templates/admin/media/upload.gohtml:21
Add the upload form to the media picker It makes easier to upload new images from the place where we need it, instead of having to go to the media section each time. It was a little messy, this one. First of all, I realized that POSTint to /admin/media/picker to get the new media field was wrong: i was not asking the server to “accept an entity”, but only requesting a new HTML value, just like a GET to /admin/media/upload requests the form to upload a new media, thus here i should do the same, except i needed the query parameters to change the field, which is fine—it is actually a different resource, thus a different URL. Then, i thought that i could not POST the upload to /admin/media, because i returned a different HTML —the media field—, so i reused the recently unused POST to /admin/media/picker to upload that file and return the HTML for the field. It was wrong, because i was not requesting the server to put the file as a subordinate of /admin/media/picker, only /admin/media, but i did not come up with any other solution. Since i had two different upload functions now, i created uploadForm’s Handle method to refactorize the duplicated logic to a single place. Unfortunately, i did not work as i expected because uploadForm’s and mediaPicker’s MustRender methods are different, and mediaPicker has to embed uploadForm to render the form in the picker. That made me change Handle’s output to a boolean and error in order for the HTTP handler function know when to render the form with the error messages with the proper MustRender handler. However, I saw the opportunity of reusing that Handler method for editMedia, that was doing mostly the same job, but had to call a different Validate than uploadForm’s, because editMedia does not require the uploaded file. That’s when i realized that i could use an interface and that this interface could be reused not only within media but throughout the application, and added HandleMultipart in form. Had to create a different interface for multipart forms because they need different parameters in Parse that non-multipart form, when i add that interface, hence had to also change Parse to ParseForm to account for the difference in signature; not a big deal. After all that, i realized that i **could** POST to /admin/media in both cases, because i always return “an HTML entity”, it just happens that for the media section it is empty with a redirect, and for the picker is the field. That made the whole Handle method a bit redundant, but i left it nevertheless, as i find it slightly easier to read the uploadMedia function now.
2023-09-21 23:40:22 +00:00
msgid "Maximum upload file size: %s"
msgstr "Tamaño máximo del archivos a subir: %s"
#: web/templates/admin/media/picker.gohtml:31
Add the edit form for services This one has an input to select the icon. It makes no sense to choose an icon only by name, thus a <select> is not appropriate, and had to use a hidden input with a row of button to choose the icon from. This works now only because there are very few icons; we’ll need to choose a different approach when there are many more icons. Since now the icons have to be defined in CSS for both the public and admin sections, i had to split it into a separate file that both sites can use. I considered the option to “include” that CSS with m4, like i do for images in demo.sql, but it made everything too complicated (e.g., having to call make for each change in the CSS), and decided to load that CSS in a separate <link>.
2023-09-25 18:10:33 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/media/upload.gohtml:26
Add the upload form to the media picker It makes easier to upload new images from the place where we need it, instead of having to go to the media section each time. It was a little messy, this one. First of all, I realized that POSTint to /admin/media/picker to get the new media field was wrong: i was not asking the server to “accept an entity”, but only requesting a new HTML value, just like a GET to /admin/media/upload requests the form to upload a new media, thus here i should do the same, except i needed the query parameters to change the field, which is fine—it is actually a different resource, thus a different URL. Then, i thought that i could not POST the upload to /admin/media, because i returned a different HTML —the media field—, so i reused the recently unused POST to /admin/media/picker to upload that file and return the HTML for the field. It was wrong, because i was not requesting the server to put the file as a subordinate of /admin/media/picker, only /admin/media, but i did not come up with any other solution. Since i had two different upload functions now, i created uploadForm’s Handle method to refactorize the duplicated logic to a single place. Unfortunately, i did not work as i expected because uploadForm’s and mediaPicker’s MustRender methods are different, and mediaPicker has to embed uploadForm to render the form in the picker. That made me change Handle’s output to a boolean and error in order for the HTTP handler function know when to render the form with the error messages with the proper MustRender handler. However, I saw the opportunity of reusing that Handler method for editMedia, that was doing mostly the same job, but had to call a different Validate than uploadForm’s, because editMedia does not require the uploaded file. That’s when i realized that i could use an interface and that this interface could be reused not only within media but throughout the application, and added HandleMultipart in form. Had to create a different interface for multipart forms because they need different parameters in Parse that non-multipart form, when i add that interface, hence had to also change Parse to ParseForm to account for the difference in signature; not a big deal. After all that, i realized that i **could** POST to /admin/media in both cases, because i always return “an HTML entity”, it just happens that for the media section it is empty with a redirect, and for the picker is the field. That made the whole Handle method a bit redundant, but i left it nevertheless, as i find it slightly easier to read the uploadMedia function now.
2023-09-21 23:40:22 +00:00
msgctxt "action"
msgid "Upload"
msgstr "Subir"
Add campsite map in SVG I intend to use the same SVG file for customers and employees, so i had to change Oriol’s design to add a class to layers that are supposed to be only for customers, like trees. These are hidden in the admin area. I understood that customers and employees have to click on a campsite to select it, and then they can book or whatever they need to do to them. Since customers and employees most certainly will need to have different listeners on campsites, i decided to add the link with JavaScript. To do so, i need a custom XML attribute with the campsite’s identifier. Since i have seen that all campsites have a label, i changed the “identifier” to the unique combination (company_id, label). The company_id is there because different companies could have the same label; i left the campsite_id primary key for foreign constraints. In this case, as a test, i add an <a> element to the campsite with a link to edit it; we’ll discuss with Oriol what exactly it needs to do. However, the original design had the labels in a different layer, that interfered with the link, as the numbers must be above the path and the link must wrap the path in order to “inherit” its shape. I had no other recourse than to move the labels in the same layer as the paths’.
2023-09-24 01:17:13 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/media/picker.gohtml:47
Add the upload form to the media picker It makes easier to upload new images from the place where we need it, instead of having to go to the media section each time. It was a little messy, this one. First of all, I realized that POSTint to /admin/media/picker to get the new media field was wrong: i was not asking the server to “accept an entity”, but only requesting a new HTML value, just like a GET to /admin/media/upload requests the form to upload a new media, thus here i should do the same, except i needed the query parameters to change the field, which is fine—it is actually a different resource, thus a different URL. Then, i thought that i could not POST the upload to /admin/media, because i returned a different HTML —the media field—, so i reused the recently unused POST to /admin/media/picker to upload that file and return the HTML for the field. It was wrong, because i was not requesting the server to put the file as a subordinate of /admin/media/picker, only /admin/media, but i did not come up with any other solution. Since i had two different upload functions now, i created uploadForm’s Handle method to refactorize the duplicated logic to a single place. Unfortunately, i did not work as i expected because uploadForm’s and mediaPicker’s MustRender methods are different, and mediaPicker has to embed uploadForm to render the form in the picker. That made me change Handle’s output to a boolean and error in order for the HTTP handler function know when to render the form with the error messages with the proper MustRender handler. However, I saw the opportunity of reusing that Handler method for editMedia, that was doing mostly the same job, but had to call a different Validate than uploadForm’s, because editMedia does not require the uploaded file. That’s when i realized that i could use an interface and that this interface could be reused not only within media but throughout the application, and added HandleMultipart in form. Had to create a different interface for multipart forms because they need different parameters in Parse that non-multipart form, when i add that interface, hence had to also change Parse to ParseForm to account for the difference in signature; not a big deal. After all that, i realized that i **could** POST to /admin/media in both cases, because i always return “an HTML entity”, it just happens that for the media section it is empty with a redirect, and for the picker is the field. That made the whole Handle method a bit redundant, but i left it nevertheless, as i find it slightly easier to read the uploadMedia function now.
2023-09-21 23:40:22 +00:00
msgctxt "title"
msgid "Choose Existing Media"
msgstr "Elección de un medio existente"
Add campsite map in SVG I intend to use the same SVG file for customers and employees, so i had to change Oriol’s design to add a class to layers that are supposed to be only for customers, like trees. These are hidden in the admin area. I understood that customers and employees have to click on a campsite to select it, and then they can book or whatever they need to do to them. Since customers and employees most certainly will need to have different listeners on campsites, i decided to add the link with JavaScript. To do so, i need a custom XML attribute with the campsite’s identifier. Since i have seen that all campsites have a label, i changed the “identifier” to the unique combination (company_id, label). The company_id is there because different companies could have the same label; i left the campsite_id primary key for foreign constraints. In this case, as a test, i add an <a> element to the campsite with a link to edit it; we’ll discuss with Oriol what exactly it needs to do. However, the original design had the labels in a different layer, that interfered with the link, as the numbers must be above the path and the link must wrap the path in order to “inherit” its shape. I had no other recourse than to move the labels in the same layer as the paths’.
2023-09-24 01:17:13 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/media/picker.gohtml:58
Add the edit form for services This one has an input to select the icon. It makes no sense to choose an icon only by name, thus a <select> is not appropriate, and had to use a hidden input with a row of button to choose the icon from. This works now only because there are very few icons; we’ll need to choose a different approach when there are many more icons. Since now the icons have to be defined in CSS for both the public and admin sections, i had to split it into a separate file that both sites can use. I considered the option to “include” that CSS with m4, like i do for images in demo.sql, but it made everything too complicated (e.g., having to call make for each change in the CSS), and decided to load that CSS in a separate <link>.
2023-09-25 18:10:33 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/media/index.gohtml:20
Add the surroundings static page This page is “highly stylized”, with a masonry-like grid, that i did not know how to generate automatically from data defined in PostgreSQL, therefore with Oriol we agreed to have this one as a static page and we will see what we can do if the customer asks to be able to change it. I was a bit undecided on whether the icons in the bottom part of the page should be defined in the CSS or with style="" and CSS variables, like i do for the campsite type in the home page. At first i thought that it should use CSS variables, mostly for coherence: if another section of the web does it for its background image, why no this one. The difference is that the home page is dynamically created from the database, while this page is static and we know what icons we need, thus it makes more sense to move it to the stylesheet file, because then it will be downloaded by user agents that actually want to use it (e.g., browsers, but not Braille terminals).
2023-09-16 22:11:39 +00:00
msgid "No media uploaded yet."
msgstr "No se ha subido ningún medio todavía."
Manage all media uploads in a single place It made no sense to have a file upload in each form that needs a media, because to reuse an existing media users would need to upload the exact same file again; this is very unusual and unfriendly. A better option is to have a “centralized” media section, where people can upload files there, and then have a picker to select from there. Ideally, there would be an upload option in the picker, but i did not add it yet. I’ve split the content from the media because i want users to have the option to update a media, for instance when they need to upload a reduced or cropped version of the same photo, without an edit they would need to upload the file as a new media and then update all places where the old version was used. And i did not want to trouble people that uploads the same photo twice: without the separate relation, doing so would throw a constraint error. I do not believe there is any security problem to have all companies link their media to the same file, as they were already readable by everyone and could upload the data from a different company to their own; in other words, it is not worse than it was now.
2023-09-20 23:56:44 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/media/form.gohtml:6
Add the edit form for services This one has an input to select the icon. It makes no sense to choose an icon only by name, thus a <select> is not appropriate, and had to use a hidden input with a row of button to choose the icon from. This works now only because there are very few icons; we’ll need to choose a different approach when there are many more icons. Since now the icons have to be defined in CSS for both the public and admin sections, i had to split it into a separate file that both sites can use. I considered the option to “include” that CSS with m4, like i do for images in demo.sql, but it made everything too complicated (e.g., having to call make for each change in the CSS), and decided to load that CSS in a separate <link>.
2023-09-25 18:10:33 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/media/form.gohtml:12
Manage all media uploads in a single place It made no sense to have a file upload in each form that needs a media, because to reuse an existing media users would need to upload the exact same file again; this is very unusual and unfriendly. A better option is to have a “centralized” media section, where people can upload files there, and then have a picker to select from there. Ideally, there would be an upload option in the picker, but i did not add it yet. I’ve split the content from the media because i want users to have the option to update a media, for instance when they need to upload a reduced or cropped version of the same photo, without an edit they would need to upload the file as a new media and then update all places where the old version was used. And i did not want to trouble people that uploads the same photo twice: without the separate relation, doing so would throw a constraint error. I do not believe there is any security problem to have all companies link their media to the same file, as they were already readable by everyone and could upload the data from a different company to their own; in other words, it is not worse than it was now.
2023-09-20 23:56:44 +00:00
msgctxt "title"
msgid "Edit Media"
msgstr "Edición de medio"
Add the edit form for services This one has an input to select the icon. It makes no sense to choose an icon only by name, thus a <select> is not appropriate, and had to use a hidden input with a row of button to choose the icon from. This works now only because there are very few icons; we’ll need to choose a different approach when there are many more icons. Since now the icons have to be defined in CSS for both the public and admin sections, i had to split it into a separate file that both sites can use. I considered the option to “include” that CSS with m4, like i do for images in demo.sql, but it made everything too complicated (e.g., having to call make for each change in the CSS), and decided to load that CSS in a separate <link>.
2023-09-25 18:10:33 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/media/form.gohtml:18
Manage all media uploads in a single place It made no sense to have a file upload in each form that needs a media, because to reuse an existing media users would need to upload the exact same file again; this is very unusual and unfriendly. A better option is to have a “centralized” media section, where people can upload files there, and then have a picker to select from there. Ideally, there would be an upload option in the picker, but i did not add it yet. I’ve split the content from the media because i want users to have the option to update a media, for instance when they need to upload a reduced or cropped version of the same photo, without an edit they would need to upload the file as a new media and then update all places where the old version was used. And i did not want to trouble people that uploads the same photo twice: without the separate relation, doing so would throw a constraint error. I do not believe there is any security problem to have all companies link their media to the same file, as they were already readable by everyone and could upload the data from a different company to their own; in other words, it is not worse than it was now.
2023-09-20 23:56:44 +00:00
msgctxt "input"
msgid "Updated file"
msgstr "Archivo actualizado"
Add the edit form for services This one has an input to select the icon. It makes no sense to choose an icon only by name, thus a <select> is not appropriate, and had to use a hidden input with a row of button to choose the icon from. This works now only because there are very few icons; we’ll need to choose a different approach when there are many more icons. Since now the icons have to be defined in CSS for both the public and admin sections, i had to split it into a separate file that both sites can use. I considered the option to “include” that CSS with m4, like i do for images in demo.sql, but it made everything too complicated (e.g., having to call make for each change in the CSS), and decided to load that CSS in a separate <link>.
2023-09-25 18:10:33 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/media/form.gohtml:27
Manage all media uploads in a single place It made no sense to have a file upload in each form that needs a media, because to reuse an existing media users would need to upload the exact same file again; this is very unusual and unfriendly. A better option is to have a “centralized” media section, where people can upload files there, and then have a picker to select from there. Ideally, there would be an upload option in the picker, but i did not add it yet. I’ve split the content from the media because i want users to have the option to update a media, for instance when they need to upload a reduced or cropped version of the same photo, without an edit they would need to upload the file as a new media and then update all places where the old version was used. And i did not want to trouble people that uploads the same photo twice: without the separate relation, doing so would throw a constraint error. I do not believe there is any security problem to have all companies link their media to the same file, as they were already readable by everyone and could upload the data from a different company to their own; in other words, it is not worse than it was now.
2023-09-20 23:56:44 +00:00
msgctxt "input"
msgid "Filename"
msgstr "Nombre de archivo"
Add the edit form for services This one has an input to select the icon. It makes no sense to choose an icon only by name, thus a <select> is not appropriate, and had to use a hidden input with a row of button to choose the icon from. This works now only because there are very few icons; we’ll need to choose a different approach when there are many more icons. Since now the icons have to be defined in CSS for both the public and admin sections, i had to split it into a separate file that both sites can use. I considered the option to “include” that CSS with m4, like i do for images in demo.sql, but it made everything too complicated (e.g., having to call make for each change in the CSS), and decided to load that CSS in a separate <link>.
2023-09-25 18:10:33 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/media/index.gohtml:12
Manage all media uploads in a single place It made no sense to have a file upload in each form that needs a media, because to reuse an existing media users would need to upload the exact same file again; this is very unusual and unfriendly. A better option is to have a “centralized” media section, where people can upload files there, and then have a picker to select from there. Ideally, there would be an upload option in the picker, but i did not add it yet. I’ve split the content from the media because i want users to have the option to update a media, for instance when they need to upload a reduced or cropped version of the same photo, without an edit they would need to upload the file as a new media and then update all places where the old version was used. And i did not want to trouble people that uploads the same photo twice: without the separate relation, doing so would throw a constraint error. I do not believe there is any security problem to have all companies link their media to the same file, as they were already readable by everyone and could upload the data from a different company to their own; in other words, it is not worse than it was now.
2023-09-20 23:56:44 +00:00
msgctxt "action"
msgid "Upload media"
msgstr "Subir medio"
Add the surroundings static page This page is “highly stylized”, with a masonry-like grid, that i did not know how to generate automatically from data defined in PostgreSQL, therefore with Oriol we agreed to have this one as a static page and we will see what we can do if the customer asks to be able to change it. I was a bit undecided on whether the icons in the bottom part of the page should be defined in the CSS or with style="" and CSS variables, like i do for the campsite type in the home page. At first i thought that it should use CSS variables, mostly for coherence: if another section of the web does it for its background image, why no this one. The difference is that the home page is dynamically created from the database, while this page is static and we know what icons we need, thus it makes more sense to move it to the stylesheet file, because then it will be downloaded by user agents that actually want to use it (e.g., browsers, but not Braille terminals).
2023-09-16 22:11:39 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/media/upload.gohtml:6
Add the edit form for services This one has an input to select the icon. It makes no sense to choose an icon only by name, thus a <select> is not appropriate, and had to use a hidden input with a row of button to choose the icon from. This works now only because there are very few icons; we’ll need to choose a different approach when there are many more icons. Since now the icons have to be defined in CSS for both the public and admin sections, i had to split it into a separate file that both sites can use. I considered the option to “include” that CSS with m4, like i do for images in demo.sql, but it made everything too complicated (e.g., having to call make for each change in the CSS), and decided to load that CSS in a separate <link>.
2023-09-25 18:10:33 +00:00
#: web/templates/admin/media/upload.gohtml:12
Add the surroundings static page This page is “highly stylized”, with a masonry-like grid, that i did not know how to generate automatically from data defined in PostgreSQL, therefore with Oriol we agreed to have this one as a static page and we will see what we can do if the customer asks to be able to change it. I was a bit undecided on whether the icons in the bottom part of the page should be defined in the CSS or with style="" and CSS variables, like i do for the campsite type in the home page. At first i thought that it should use CSS variables, mostly for coherence: if another section of the web does it for its background image, why no this one. The difference is that the home page is dynamically created from the database, while this page is static and we know what icons we need, thus it makes more sense to move it to the stylesheet file, because then it will be downloaded by user agents that actually want to use it (e.g., browsers, but not Braille terminals).
2023-09-16 22:11:39 +00:00
msgctxt "title"
msgid "Upload Media"
msgstr "Subida de medio"
Replace use of L10NInput with I18nInput for campsite
2024-01-10 20:52:49 +00:00
#: pkg/legal/admin.go:255 pkg/app/user.go:249 pkg/campsite/types/option.go:344
#: pkg/campsite/types/feature.go:259 pkg/campsite/types/admin.go:453
#: pkg/season/l10n.go:69 pkg/season/admin.go:405 pkg/services/l10n.go:73
#: pkg/services/admin.go:266
Add management of legal texts
2023-12-22 01:23:18 +00:00
msgid "Name can not be empty."
msgstr "No podéis dejar el nombre en blanco."
Replace use of L10NInput with I18nInput for campsite
2024-01-10 20:52:49 +00:00
#: pkg/legal/admin.go:256 pkg/campsite/types/option.go:345
#: pkg/campsite/types/feature.go:260 pkg/campsite/types/admin.go:454
Add management of legal texts
2023-12-22 01:23:18 +00:00
msgid "Name must have at least one letter."
msgstr "El nombre tiene que tener como mínimo una letra."
Use I18nInput instead of L10nInput to translate carousels
2024-01-12 18:33:44 +00:00
#: pkg/carousel/admin.go:269 pkg/campsite/types/carousel.go:223
Manage all media uploads in a single place It made no sense to have a file upload in each form that needs a media, because to reuse an existing media users would need to upload the exact same file again; this is very unusual and unfriendly. A better option is to have a “centralized” media section, where people can upload files there, and then have a picker to select from there. Ideally, there would be an upload option in the picker, but i did not add it yet. I’ve split the content from the media because i want users to have the option to update a media, for instance when they need to upload a reduced or cropped version of the same photo, without an edit they would need to upload the file as a new media and then update all places where the old version was used. And i did not want to trouble people that uploads the same photo twice: without the separate relation, doing so would throw a constraint error. I do not believe there is any security problem to have all companies link their media to the same file, as they were already readable by everyone and could upload the data from a different company to their own; in other words, it is not worse than it was now.
2023-09-20 23:56:44 +00:00
msgctxt "input"
Fix the label and prompt for the carousel media field
2023-09-22 00:17:56 +00:00
msgid "Slide image"
msgstr "Imagen de la diapositiva"
Manage all media uploads in a single place It made no sense to have a file upload in each form that needs a media, because to reuse an existing media users would need to upload the exact same file again; this is very unusual and unfriendly. A better option is to have a “centralized” media section, where people can upload files there, and then have a picker to select from there. Ideally, there would be an upload option in the picker, but i did not add it yet. I’ve split the content from the media because i want users to have the option to update a media, for instance when they need to upload a reduced or cropped version of the same photo, without an edit they would need to upload the file as a new media and then update all places where the old version was used. And i did not want to trouble people that uploads the same photo twice: without the separate relation, doing so would throw a constraint error. I do not believe there is any security problem to have all companies link their media to the same file, as they were already readable by everyone and could upload the data from a different company to their own; in other words, it is not worse than it was now.
2023-09-20 23:56:44 +00:00
Use I18nInput instead of L10nInput to translate carousels
2024-01-12 18:33:44 +00:00
#: pkg/carousel/admin.go:270 pkg/campsite/types/carousel.go:224
Manage all media uploads in a single place It made no sense to have a file upload in each form that needs a media, because to reuse an existing media users would need to upload the exact same file again; this is very unusual and unfriendly. A better option is to have a “centralized” media section, where people can upload files there, and then have a picker to select from there. Ideally, there would be an upload option in the picker, but i did not add it yet. I’ve split the content from the media because i want users to have the option to update a media, for instance when they need to upload a reduced or cropped version of the same photo, without an edit they would need to upload the file as a new media and then update all places where the old version was used. And i did not want to trouble people that uploads the same photo twice: without the separate relation, doing so would throw a constraint error. I do not believe there is any security problem to have all companies link their media to the same file, as they were already readable by everyone and could upload the data from a different company to their own; in other words, it is not worse than it was now.
2023-09-20 23:56:44 +00:00
msgctxt "action"
Fix the label and prompt for the carousel media field
2023-09-22 00:17:56 +00:00
msgid "Set slide image"
msgstr "Establecer la imagen de la diapositiva"
Manage all media uploads in a single place It made no sense to have a file upload in each form that needs a media, because to reuse an existing media users would need to upload the exact same file again; this is very unusual and unfriendly. A better option is to have a “centralized” media section, where people can upload files there, and then have a picker to select from there. Ideally, there would be an upload option in the picker, but i did not add it yet. I’ve split the content from the media because i want users to have the option to update a media, for instance when they need to upload a reduced or cropped version of the same photo, without an edit they would need to upload the file as a new media and then update all places where the old version was used. And i did not want to trouble people that uploads the same photo twice: without the separate relation, doing so would throw a constraint error. I do not believe there is any security problem to have all companies link their media to the same file, as they were already readable by everyone and could upload the data from a different company to their own; in other words, it is not worse than it was now.
2023-09-20 23:56:44 +00:00
Use I18nInput instead of L10nInput to translate carousels
2024-01-12 18:33:44 +00:00
#: pkg/carousel/admin.go:339 pkg/campsite/types/carousel.go:297
Manage all media uploads in a single place It made no sense to have a file upload in each form that needs a media, because to reuse an existing media users would need to upload the exact same file again; this is very unusual and unfriendly. A better option is to have a “centralized” media section, where people can upload files there, and then have a picker to select from there. Ideally, there would be an upload option in the picker, but i did not add it yet. I’ve split the content from the media because i want users to have the option to update a media, for instance when they need to upload a reduced or cropped version of the same photo, without an edit they would need to upload the file as a new media and then update all places where the old version was used. And i did not want to trouble people that uploads the same photo twice: without the separate relation, doing so would throw a constraint error. I do not believe there is any security problem to have all companies link their media to the same file, as they were already readable by everyone and could upload the data from a different company to their own; in other words, it is not worse than it was now.
2023-09-20 23:56:44 +00:00
msgid "Slide image can not be empty."
msgstr "No podéis dejar la imagen de la diapositiva en blanco."
Use I18nInput instead of L10nInput to translate carousels
2024-01-12 18:33:44 +00:00
#: pkg/carousel/admin.go:340 pkg/campsite/types/carousel.go:298
Fix the label and prompt for the carousel media field
2023-09-22 00:17:56 +00:00
msgid "Slide image must be an image media type."
msgstr "La imagen de la diapositiva tiene que ser un medio de tipo imagen."
Manage all media uploads in a single place It made no sense to have a file upload in each form that needs a media, because to reuse an existing media users would need to upload the exact same file again; this is very unusual and unfriendly. A better option is to have a “centralized” media section, where people can upload files there, and then have a picker to select from there. Ideally, there would be an upload option in the picker, but i did not add it yet. I’ve split the content from the media because i want users to have the option to update a media, for instance when they need to upload a reduced or cropped version of the same photo, without an edit they would need to upload the file as a new media and then update all places where the old version was used. And i did not want to trouble people that uploads the same photo twice: without the separate relation, doing so would throw a constraint error. I do not believe there is any security problem to have all companies link their media to the same file, as they were already readable by everyone and could upload the data from a different company to their own; in other words, it is not worse than it was now.
2023-09-20 23:56:44 +00:00
Add the Catalonia’s Tourism Registry number to company It is required to be displayed on the website of tourism companies of Catalonia.
2023-10-14 19:59:36 +00:00
#: pkg/app/login.go:56 pkg/app/user.go:246 pkg/company/admin.go:210
Add user-defined order to campsite types, options, seasons and carousels I use Sortable, exactly like HTMx’s sorting example does[0]. Had to export the slug or ID of some entries to be able to add it in the hidden input. For forms that use ID instead of slug, had to use an input name other than “id” because otherwise the swap would fail due to bug #1496[1]. It is apparently fixed in a recent version of HTMx, but i did not want to update for fear of behaviour changes. [0]: https://htmx.org/examples/sortable/ [1]: https://github.com/bigskysoftware/htmx/issues/1496
2023-12-20 18:52:14 +00:00
#: pkg/booking/public.go:269
Convert the login variables to a struct with parsing and validation It is a lot of code having to check the login variables inside the POST handler, and i could not mark each input field individually as invalid because the generic errors array i was using did no identify which field had the error. Thus, i use more or less the same technique as with Numerus: a struct with the value and the error message. This time the input field does not have the label and extra attributes because i believe this belongs to the template: if i want do reuse the same form template, i should create a common template rather than defining everything in Go. The name is a bit different, however, because it has meaning both to the front and back ends, as it needs to be exactly the same. Writing it twice is error-prone, as with a rename i could easily forget to change one or the other, and here i see value in having that in Go, because it is also used in code.
2023-07-24 15:17:15 +00:00
msgid "Email can not be empty."
msgstr "No podéis dejar el correo-e en blanco."
Add the Catalonia’s Tourism Registry number to company It is required to be displayed on the website of tourism companies of Catalonia.
2023-10-14 19:59:36 +00:00
#: pkg/app/login.go:57 pkg/app/user.go:247 pkg/company/admin.go:211
Add user-defined order to campsite types, options, seasons and carousels I use Sortable, exactly like HTMx’s sorting example does[0]. Had to export the slug or ID of some entries to be able to add it in the hidden input. For forms that use ID instead of slug, had to use an input name other than “id” because otherwise the swap would fail due to bug #1496[1]. It is apparently fixed in a recent version of HTMx, but i did not want to update for fear of behaviour changes. [0]: https://htmx.org/examples/sortable/ [1]: https://github.com/bigskysoftware/htmx/issues/1496
2023-12-20 18:52:14 +00:00
#: pkg/booking/public.go:270
Convert the login variables to a struct with parsing and validation It is a lot of code having to check the login variables inside the POST handler, and i could not mark each input field individually as invalid because the generic errors array i was using did no identify which field had the error. Thus, i use more or less the same technique as with Numerus: a struct with the value and the error message. This time the input field does not have the label and extra attributes because i believe this belongs to the template: if i want do reuse the same form template, i should create a common template rather than defining everything in Go. The name is a bit different, however, because it has meaning both to the front and back ends, as it needs to be exactly the same. Writing it twice is error-prone, as with a rename i could easily forget to change one or the other, and here i see value in having that in Go, because it is also used in code.
2023-07-24 15:17:15 +00:00
msgid "This email is not valid. It should be like name@domain.com."
msgstr "Este correo-e no es válido. Tiene que ser parecido a nombre@dominio.com."
Add the logout button Conceptually, to logout we have to “delete the session”, thus the best HTTP verb would be `DELETE`. However, there is no way to send a `DELETE` request with a regular HTML form, and it seems that never will be[0]. I could use a POST, optionally with a “method override” technique, but i was planing to use HTMx anyway, so this was as good an opportunity to include it as any. In this application i am not concerned with people not having JavaScript enabled, because it is for a customer that has a known environment, and we do not have much time anyway. Therefore, i opted to forgo progressive enhancement in cases like this: if `DELETE` is needed, use `hx-delete`. Unfortunately, i can not use a <form> with a hidden <input> for the CSRF token, because `DELETE` requests do not have body and the value should be added as query parameters, like a form with GET method, but HTMx does the incorrect thing here: sends the values in the request’s body. That’s why i have to use a custom header and the `hx-header` directive to include the CSRF token. Then, by default HTMx targets the triggered element for swap with the response from the server, but after a logout i want to redirect the user to the login form again. I could set the hx-target to button to replace the whole body, or tell the client to redirect to the new location. I actually do not know which one is “better”. Maybe the hx-target is best because then everything is handled by the client, but in the case of logout, since it is possible that i might want to load scripts only for logged-in users in the future, i opted for the full page reload. However, HTMx does not want to reload a page that return HTTP 401, hence i had to include the GET method to /login in order to return the login form with a response of HTTP 200, which also helps when reloading in the browser after a failed login attempt. I am not worried with the HTTP 401 when attempting to load a page as guest, because this request most probably comes from the browser, not HTMx, and it will show the login form as intended—even though it is not compliant, since it does not return the WWW-Authenticate header, but this is the best i can do given that no cookie-based authentication method has been accepted[1]. [0]: https://www.w3.org/Bugs/Public/show_bug.cgi?id=10671#c16 [1]: https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/id/draft-broyer-http-cookie-auth-00.html
2023-07-26 11:49:47 +00:00
#: pkg/app/login.go:59
Convert the login variables to a struct with parsing and validation It is a lot of code having to check the login variables inside the POST handler, and i could not mark each input field individually as invalid because the generic errors array i was using did no identify which field had the error. Thus, i use more or less the same technique as with Numerus: a struct with the value and the error message. This time the input field does not have the label and extra attributes because i believe this belongs to the template: if i want do reuse the same form template, i should create a common template rather than defining everything in Go. The name is a bit different, however, because it has meaning both to the front and back ends, as it needs to be exactly the same. Writing it twice is error-prone, as with a rename i could easily forget to change one or the other, and here i see value in having that in Go, because it is also used in code.
2023-07-24 15:17:15 +00:00
msgid "Password can not be empty."
msgstr "No podéis dejar la contraseña en blanco."
Add profile form, inside a user menu This is the first form that uses HTMx, and can not return a 400 error code because otherwise HTMx does not render the content. Since now there are pages that do not render the whole html, with header and body, i need a different layout for these, and moved the common code to handle forms and such a new template file that both layouts can use. I also need the request in template.MustRender to check which layout i should use. Closes #7.
2023-07-26 18:46:09 +00:00
#: pkg/app/login.go:86
Convert the login variables to a struct with parsing and validation It is a lot of code having to check the login variables inside the POST handler, and i could not mark each input field individually as invalid because the generic errors array i was using did no identify which field had the error. Thus, i use more or less the same technique as with Numerus: a struct with the value and the error message. This time the input field does not have the label and extra attributes because i believe this belongs to the template: if i want do reuse the same form template, i should create a common template rather than defining everything in Go. The name is a bit different, however, because it has meaning both to the front and back ends, as it needs to be exactly the same. Writing it twice is error-prone, as with a rename i could easily forget to change one or the other, and here i see value in having that in Go, because it is also used in code.
2023-07-24 15:17:15 +00:00
msgid "Invalid user or password."
msgstr "Usuario o contraseña incorrectos."
Add the logout button Conceptually, to logout we have to “delete the session”, thus the best HTTP verb would be `DELETE`. However, there is no way to send a `DELETE` request with a regular HTML form, and it seems that never will be[0]. I could use a POST, optionally with a “method override” technique, but i was planing to use HTMx anyway, so this was as good an opportunity to include it as any. In this application i am not concerned with people not having JavaScript enabled, because it is for a customer that has a known environment, and we do not have much time anyway. Therefore, i opted to forgo progressive enhancement in cases like this: if `DELETE` is needed, use `hx-delete`. Unfortunately, i can not use a <form> with a hidden <input> for the CSRF token, because `DELETE` requests do not have body and the value should be added as query parameters, like a form with GET method, but HTMx does the incorrect thing here: sends the values in the request’s body. That’s why i have to use a custom header and the `hx-header` directive to include the CSRF token. Then, by default HTMx targets the triggered element for swap with the response from the server, but after a logout i want to redirect the user to the login form again. I could set the hx-target to button to replace the whole body, or tell the client to redirect to the new location. I actually do not know which one is “better”. Maybe the hx-target is best because then everything is handled by the client, but in the case of logout, since it is possible that i might want to load scripts only for logged-in users in the future, i opted for the full page reload. However, HTMx does not want to reload a page that return HTTP 401, hence i had to include the GET method to /login in order to return the login form with a response of HTTP 200, which also helps when reloading in the browser after a failed login attempt. I am not worried with the HTTP 401 when attempting to load a page as guest, because this request most probably comes from the browser, not HTMx, and it will show the login form as intended—even though it is not compliant, since it does not return the WWW-Authenticate header, but this is the best i can do given that no cookie-based authentication method has been accepted[1]. [0]: https://www.w3.org/Bugs/Public/show_bug.cgi?id=10671#c16 [1]: https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/id/draft-broyer-http-cookie-auth-00.html
2023-07-26 11:49:47 +00:00
Add public page for campsite type, and function to edit them Had to export and move PublicPage struct to template because i can not import app from campsites/types: app already imports campsite for the http handler, and it, in turn, imports the types package for its own http handler; an import loop. Also had to replace PublicPage.MustRender with a Setup function because the page passed down to html/template was the PublicPage struct, not whatever struct embeds it. I was thinking more of Java inheritance here rather than struct embedding.
2023-08-08 00:29:14 +00:00
#: pkg/app/user.go:197
Add profile form, inside a user menu This is the first form that uses HTMx, and can not return a 400 error code because otherwise HTMx does not render the content. Since now there are pages that do not render the whole html, with header and body, i need a different layout for these, and moved the common code to handle forms and such a new template file that both layouts can use. I also need the request in template.MustRender to check which layout i should use. Closes #7.
2023-07-26 18:46:09 +00:00
msgctxt "language option"
msgid "Automatic"
msgstr "Automático"
Add public page for campsite type, and function to edit them Had to export and move PublicPage struct to template because i can not import app from campsites/types: app already imports campsite for the http handler, and it, in turn, imports the types package for its own http handler; an import loop. Also had to replace PublicPage.MustRender with a Setup function because the page passed down to html/template was the PublicPage struct, not whatever struct embeds it. I was thinking more of Java inheritance here rather than struct embedding.
2023-08-08 00:29:14 +00:00
#: pkg/app/user.go:250
Add profile form, inside a user menu This is the first form that uses HTMx, and can not return a 400 error code because otherwise HTMx does not render the content. Since now there are pages that do not render the whole html, with header and body, i need a different layout for these, and moved the common code to handle forms and such a new template file that both layouts can use. I also need the request in template.MustRender to check which layout i should use. Closes #7.
2023-07-26 18:46:09 +00:00
msgid "Confirmation does not match password."
msgstr "La confirmación no se corresponde con la contraseña."
Add the Catalonia’s Tourism Registry number to company It is required to be displayed on the website of tourism companies of Catalonia.
2023-10-14 19:59:36 +00:00
#: pkg/app/user.go:251 pkg/company/admin.go:226
Add profile form, inside a user menu This is the first form that uses HTMx, and can not return a 400 error code because otherwise HTMx does not render the content. Since now there are pages that do not render the whole html, with header and body, i need a different layout for these, and moved the common code to handle forms and such a new template file that both layouts can use. I also need the request in template.MustRender to check which layout i should use. Closes #7.
2023-07-26 18:46:09 +00:00
msgid "Selected language is not valid."
msgstr "El idioma escogido no es válido."
Manage all media uploads in a single place It made no sense to have a file upload in each form that needs a media, because to reuse an existing media users would need to upload the exact same file again; this is very unusual and unfriendly. A better option is to have a “centralized” media section, where people can upload files there, and then have a picker to select from there. Ideally, there would be an upload option in the picker, but i did not add it yet. I’ve split the content from the media because i want users to have the option to update a media, for instance when they need to upload a reduced or cropped version of the same photo, without an edit they would need to upload the file as a new media and then update all places where the old version was used. And i did not want to trouble people that uploads the same photo twice: without the separate relation, doing so would throw a constraint error. I do not believe there is any security problem to have all companies link their media to the same file, as they were already readable by everyone and could upload the data from a different company to their own; in other words, it is not worse than it was now.
2023-09-20 23:56:44 +00:00
#: pkg/app/user.go:253
Allow users to update their profile images I do not see the profile image as an “integral part” of the user (i.e., no need for constraints), hence i do not want to store it in the database, as would do for the identification image during check-in. By default, i store the avatars in /var/lib/camper/avatars, but it is a variable to allow packagers change this value using the linker. This is also served as a test bed for uploading files to the server, that now has a better interface and uses less resources that what i did to Numerus. Now the profile handler needs to keep a variable to know the path to the avatars’ directory, thus i had to change it to a struct nested in app, much like the fileHandler does. It still has to return the HandlerFunc, however, as this function needs to close over the user and connection variables. Part of #7.
2023-07-28 18:15:09 +00:00
msgid "File must be a valid PNG or JPEG image."
msgstr "El archivo tiene que ser una imagen PNG o JPEG válida."
Add management of legal texts
2023-12-22 01:23:18 +00:00
#: pkg/app/admin.go:62
Split templates and handlers into admin and public I need to check that the user is an employee (or admin) in administration handlers, but i do not want to do it for each handler, because i am bound to forget it. Thus, i added the /admin sub-path for these resources. The public-facing web is the rest of the resources outside /admin, but for now there is only home, to test whether it works as expected or not. The public-facing web can not relay on the user’s language settings, as the guest user has no way to set that. I would be happy to just use the Accept-Language header for that, but apparently Google does not use that header[0], and they give four alternatives: a country-specific domain, a subdomain with a generic top-level domain (gTLD), subdirectories with a gTLD, or URL parameters (e.g., site.com?loc=de). Of the four, Google does not recommend URL parameters, and the customer is already using subdirectories with the current site, therefor that’s what i have chosen. Google also tells me that it is a very good idea to have links between localized version of the same resources, either with <link> elements, Link HTTP response headers, or a sitemap file[1]; they are all equivalent in the eyes of Google. I have choosen the Link response headers way, because for that i can simply “augment” ResponseHeader to automatically add these headers when the response status is 2xx, otherwise i would need to pass down the original URL path until it reaches the template. Even though Camper is supposed to be a “generic”, multi-company application, i think i will stick to the easiest route and write the templates for just the “first” customer. [0]: https://developers.google.com/search/docs/specialty/international/managing-multi-regional-sites [1]: https://developers.google.com/search/docs/specialty/international/localized-versions
2023-08-05 01:42:37 +00:00
msgid "Access forbidden"
msgstr "Acceso prohibido"
Replace use of L10NInput with I18nInput for campsite
2024-01-10 20:52:49 +00:00
#: pkg/campsite/types/option.go:348
Add campsite type options, mainly for plots
2023-10-06 11:26:01 +00:00
msgid "Minimum can not be empty."
msgstr "No podéis dejar el mínimo en blanco."
Replace use of L10NInput with I18nInput for campsite
2024-01-10 20:52:49 +00:00
#: pkg/campsite/types/option.go:349
Add campsite type options, mainly for plots
2023-10-06 11:26:01 +00:00
msgid "Minimum must be an integer number."
msgstr "El valor de mínimo tiene que ser un número entero."
Replace use of L10NInput with I18nInput for campsite
2024-01-10 20:52:49 +00:00
#: pkg/campsite/types/option.go:351
Add campsite type options, mainly for plots
2023-10-06 11:26:01 +00:00
msgid "Minimum must be zero or greater."
msgstr "El valor de mínimo tiene que ser como mínimo cero."
Replace use of L10NInput with I18nInput for campsite
2024-01-10 20:52:49 +00:00
#: pkg/campsite/types/option.go:354
Add campsite type options, mainly for plots
2023-10-06 11:26:01 +00:00
msgid "Maximum can not be empty."
msgstr "No podéis dejar el máxmimo en blanco."
Replace use of L10NInput with I18nInput for campsite
2024-01-10 20:52:49 +00:00
#: pkg/campsite/types/option.go:355
Add campsite type options, mainly for plots
2023-10-06 11:26:01 +00:00
msgid "Maximum must be an integer number."
msgstr "El valor del máximo tiene que ser un número entero."
Replace use of L10NInput with I18nInput for campsite
2024-01-10 20:52:49 +00:00
#: pkg/campsite/types/option.go:357
Add campsite type options, mainly for plots
2023-10-06 11:26:01 +00:00
msgid "Maximum must be equal or greater than minimum."
msgstr "El valor del máximo tiene que ser igual o mayor al del mínimo."
Replace use of L10NInput with I18nInput for campsite
2024-01-10 20:52:49 +00:00
#: pkg/campsite/types/option.go:361 pkg/campsite/types/admin.go:467
Add campsite type options, mainly for plots
2023-10-06 11:26:01 +00:00
msgid "Price per night can not be empty."
msgstr "No podéis dejar el precio por noche en blanco."
Replace use of L10NInput with I18nInput for campsite
2024-01-10 20:52:49 +00:00
#: pkg/campsite/types/option.go:362 pkg/campsite/types/admin.go:468
Add campsite type options, mainly for plots
2023-10-06 11:26:01 +00:00
msgid "Price per night must be a decimal number."
msgstr "El precio por noche tien que ser un número decimal."
Replace use of L10NInput with I18nInput for campsite
2024-01-10 20:52:49 +00:00
#: pkg/campsite/types/option.go:363 pkg/campsite/types/admin.go:469
Add campsite type options, mainly for plots
2023-10-06 11:26:01 +00:00
msgid "Price per night must be zero or greater."
msgstr "El precio por noche tiene que ser como mínimo cero."
Replace use of L10NInput with I18nInput for campsite
2024-01-10 20:52:49 +00:00
#: pkg/campsite/types/feature.go:258 pkg/services/admin.go:265
Add the list of features for campsite type
2023-10-13 18:30:31 +00:00
msgid "Selected icon is not valid."
msgstr "El icono escogido no es válido."
Replace use of L10NInput with I18nInput for campsite
2024-01-10 20:52:49 +00:00
#: pkg/campsite/types/admin.go:304
Fix the label and prompt for the carousel media field
2023-09-22 00:17:56 +00:00
msgctxt "input"
msgid "Cover image"
msgstr "Imagen de portada"
Replace use of L10NInput with I18nInput for campsite
2024-01-10 20:52:49 +00:00
#: pkg/campsite/types/admin.go:305
Manage all media uploads in a single place It made no sense to have a file upload in each form that needs a media, because to reuse an existing media users would need to upload the exact same file again; this is very unusual and unfriendly. A better option is to have a “centralized” media section, where people can upload files there, and then have a picker to select from there. Ideally, there would be an upload option in the picker, but i did not add it yet. I’ve split the content from the media because i want users to have the option to update a media, for instance when they need to upload a reduced or cropped version of the same photo, without an edit they would need to upload the file as a new media and then update all places where the old version was used. And i did not want to trouble people that uploads the same photo twice: without the separate relation, doing so would throw a constraint error. I do not believe there is any security problem to have all companies link their media to the same file, as they were already readable by everyone and could upload the data from a different company to their own; in other words, it is not worse than it was now.
2023-09-20 23:56:44 +00:00
msgctxt "action"
msgid "Set campsite type cover"
msgstr "Establecer la portada del tipo de alojamiento"
Replace use of L10NInput with I18nInput for campsite
2024-01-10 20:52:49 +00:00
#: pkg/campsite/types/admin.go:456
Add the sample campsite types to the demo file Since campsite types need a media, i have to insert also images to the media relation. The best would be to use PostgreSQL’s pg_read_binary_file to read the media content from actual files when inserting the new rows, but the files need to be within the database cluster directory, or have to use an absolute path when running as a superuser to read from files outside the cluster directory, which means that it would depend on the path where i leave the files, that is different in development that in staging. To avoid that problem i can simply insert the rows using their base64 strings, with PostgreSQL’s decode. The images are kind of small, but i was worried that each change in demo.sql would duplicate that data in git, even if the change is not related to the images, because git stores the whole file; even if small, soon everything adds up. I do not care if the _final_ demo.sql is big, as this file is packaged in a different deb and is only installed in staging, so i’ve chosen to use m4 to build a single “amalgamated” SQL file from the base .sql file and the individual image files converted to base64 strings. That way, each image is individually managed by git and the base .sql file does not balloon up for each little change. Changed m4’s quotes to [[ ]] because the default ` ' was interfering with Intellij’s syntax highlighting.
2023-09-10 01:57:46 +00:00
msgid "Cover image can not be empty."
msgstr "No podéis dejar la imagen de portada en blanco."
Replace use of L10NInput with I18nInput for campsite
2024-01-10 20:52:49 +00:00
#: pkg/campsite/types/admin.go:457
Fix the label and prompt for the carousel media field
2023-09-22 00:17:56 +00:00
msgid "Cover image must be an image media type."
msgstr "La imagen de portada tiene que ser un medio de tipo imagen."
Replace use of L10NInput with I18nInput for campsite
2024-01-10 20:52:49 +00:00
#: pkg/campsite/types/admin.go:461
Add max campers and dogs allowed fields to campsite types
2023-09-29 18:17:39 +00:00
msgid "Maximum number of campers can not be empty."
msgstr "No podéis dejar el número máximo de personas en blanco."
Replace use of L10NInput with I18nInput for campsite
2024-01-10 20:52:49 +00:00
#: pkg/campsite/types/admin.go:462
Add max campers and dogs allowed fields to campsite types
2023-09-29 18:17:39 +00:00
msgid "Maximum number of campers must be an integer number."
msgstr "El número máximo de personas tiene que ser entero."
Replace use of L10NInput with I18nInput for campsite
2024-01-10 20:52:49 +00:00
#: pkg/campsite/types/admin.go:463
Add max campers and dogs allowed fields to campsite types
2023-09-29 18:17:39 +00:00
msgid "Maximum number of campers must be one or greater."
msgstr "El número máximo de personas no puede ser cero."
Replace use of L10NInput with I18nInput for campsite
2024-01-10 20:52:49 +00:00
#: pkg/campsite/types/admin.go:472
Add the campsite type cost per season
2023-10-01 19:14:39 +00:00
msgid "Minimum number of nights can not be empty."
msgstr "No podéis dejar el número mínimo de noches en blanco."
Replace use of L10NInput with I18nInput for campsite
2024-01-10 20:52:49 +00:00
#: pkg/campsite/types/admin.go:473
Add the campsite type cost per season
2023-10-01 19:14:39 +00:00
msgid "Minimum number of nights must be an integer."
msgstr "El número mínimo de noches tiene que ser entero."
Replace use of L10NInput with I18nInput for campsite
2024-01-10 20:52:49 +00:00
#: pkg/campsite/types/admin.go:474
Add the campsite type cost per season
2023-10-01 19:14:39 +00:00
msgid "Minimum number of nights must be one or greater."
msgstr "El número mínimo de noches no puede ser cero."
Add user-defined order to campsite types, options, seasons and carousels I use Sortable, exactly like HTMx’s sorting example does[0]. Had to export the slug or ID of some entries to be able to add it in the hidden input. For forms that use ID instead of slug, had to use an input name other than “id” because otherwise the swap would fail due to bug #1496[1]. It is apparently fixed in a recent version of HTMx, but i did not want to update for fear of behaviour changes. [0]: https://htmx.org/examples/sortable/ [1]: https://github.com/bigskysoftware/htmx/issues/1496
2023-12-20 18:52:14 +00:00
#: pkg/campsite/admin.go:226 pkg/booking/public.go:278
Add the campsite relation, HTTP handlers, and form For now, there is only the label, type, and active fields. We will need some field to hold the area on the map, but this requires #4, and possibly #6, to be finished. Part of #27.
2023-08-14 18:18:26 +00:00
msgid "Selected campsite type is not valid."
msgstr "El tipo de alojamiento escogido no es válido."
Add campsite map in SVG I intend to use the same SVG file for customers and employees, so i had to change Oriol’s design to add a class to layers that are supposed to be only for customers, like trees. These are hidden in the admin area. I understood that customers and employees have to click on a campsite to select it, and then they can book or whatever they need to do to them. Since customers and employees most certainly will need to have different listeners on campsites, i decided to add the link with JavaScript. To do so, i need a custom XML attribute with the campsite’s identifier. Since i have seen that all campsites have a label, i changed the “identifier” to the unique combination (company_id, label). The company_id is there because different companies could have the same label; i left the campsite_id primary key for foreign constraints. In this case, as a test, i add an <a> element to the campsite with a link to edit it; we’ll discuss with Oriol what exactly it needs to do. However, the original design had the labels in a different layer, that interfered with the link, as the numbers must be above the path and the link must wrap the path in order to “inherit” its shape. I had no other recourse than to move the labels in the same layer as the paths’.
2023-09-24 01:17:13 +00:00
#: pkg/campsite/admin.go:227
Add the campsite relation, HTTP handlers, and form For now, there is only the label, type, and active fields. We will need some field to hold the area on the map, but this requires #4, and possibly #6, to be finished. Part of #27.
2023-08-14 18:18:26 +00:00
msgid "Label can not be empty."
msgstr "No podéis dejar la etiqueta en blanco."
Add user-defined order to campsite types, options, seasons and carousels I use Sortable, exactly like HTMx’s sorting example does[0]. Had to export the slug or ID of some entries to be able to add it in the hidden input. For forms that use ID instead of slug, had to use an input name other than “id” because otherwise the swap would fail due to bug #1496[1]. It is apparently fixed in a recent version of HTMx, but i did not want to update for fear of behaviour changes. [0]: https://htmx.org/examples/sortable/ [1]: https://github.com/bigskysoftware/htmx/issues/1496
2023-12-20 18:52:14 +00:00
#: pkg/season/admin.go:222
Add the season_calendar relation and table on the admin section This calendar is supposed to be edited by admin users, but do not yet have the complete JavaScript code to do so, thus for now i have made it read-only.
2023-09-27 00:23:09 +00:00
msgctxt "month"
msgid "January"
msgstr "enero"
Add user-defined order to campsite types, options, seasons and carousels I use Sortable, exactly like HTMx’s sorting example does[0]. Had to export the slug or ID of some entries to be able to add it in the hidden input. For forms that use ID instead of slug, had to use an input name other than “id” because otherwise the swap would fail due to bug #1496[1]. It is apparently fixed in a recent version of HTMx, but i did not want to update for fear of behaviour changes. [0]: https://htmx.org/examples/sortable/ [1]: https://github.com/bigskysoftware/htmx/issues/1496
2023-12-20 18:52:14 +00:00
#: pkg/season/admin.go:223
Add the season_calendar relation and table on the admin section This calendar is supposed to be edited by admin users, but do not yet have the complete JavaScript code to do so, thus for now i have made it read-only.
2023-09-27 00:23:09 +00:00
msgctxt "month"
msgid "February"
msgstr "febrero"
Add user-defined order to campsite types, options, seasons and carousels I use Sortable, exactly like HTMx’s sorting example does[0]. Had to export the slug or ID of some entries to be able to add it in the hidden input. For forms that use ID instead of slug, had to use an input name other than “id” because otherwise the swap would fail due to bug #1496[1]. It is apparently fixed in a recent version of HTMx, but i did not want to update for fear of behaviour changes. [0]: https://htmx.org/examples/sortable/ [1]: https://github.com/bigskysoftware/htmx/issues/1496
2023-12-20 18:52:14 +00:00
#: pkg/season/admin.go:224
Add the season_calendar relation and table on the admin section This calendar is supposed to be edited by admin users, but do not yet have the complete JavaScript code to do so, thus for now i have made it read-only.
2023-09-27 00:23:09 +00:00
msgctxt "month"
msgid "March"
msgstr "marzo"
Add user-defined order to campsite types, options, seasons and carousels I use Sortable, exactly like HTMx’s sorting example does[0]. Had to export the slug or ID of some entries to be able to add it in the hidden input. For forms that use ID instead of slug, had to use an input name other than “id” because otherwise the swap would fail due to bug #1496[1]. It is apparently fixed in a recent version of HTMx, but i did not want to update for fear of behaviour changes. [0]: https://htmx.org/examples/sortable/ [1]: https://github.com/bigskysoftware/htmx/issues/1496
2023-12-20 18:52:14 +00:00
#: pkg/season/admin.go:225
Add the season_calendar relation and table on the admin section This calendar is supposed to be edited by admin users, but do not yet have the complete JavaScript code to do so, thus for now i have made it read-only.
2023-09-27 00:23:09 +00:00
msgctxt "month"
msgid "April"
msgstr "abril"
Add user-defined order to campsite types, options, seasons and carousels I use Sortable, exactly like HTMx’s sorting example does[0]. Had to export the slug or ID of some entries to be able to add it in the hidden input. For forms that use ID instead of slug, had to use an input name other than “id” because otherwise the swap would fail due to bug #1496[1]. It is apparently fixed in a recent version of HTMx, but i did not want to update for fear of behaviour changes. [0]: https://htmx.org/examples/sortable/ [1]: https://github.com/bigskysoftware/htmx/issues/1496
2023-12-20 18:52:14 +00:00
#: pkg/season/admin.go:226
Add the season_calendar relation and table on the admin section This calendar is supposed to be edited by admin users, but do not yet have the complete JavaScript code to do so, thus for now i have made it read-only.
2023-09-27 00:23:09 +00:00
msgctxt "month"
msgid "May"
msgstr "mayo"
Add user-defined order to campsite types, options, seasons and carousels I use Sortable, exactly like HTMx’s sorting example does[0]. Had to export the slug or ID of some entries to be able to add it in the hidden input. For forms that use ID instead of slug, had to use an input name other than “id” because otherwise the swap would fail due to bug #1496[1]. It is apparently fixed in a recent version of HTMx, but i did not want to update for fear of behaviour changes. [0]: https://htmx.org/examples/sortable/ [1]: https://github.com/bigskysoftware/htmx/issues/1496
2023-12-20 18:52:14 +00:00
#: pkg/season/admin.go:227
Add the season_calendar relation and table on the admin section This calendar is supposed to be edited by admin users, but do not yet have the complete JavaScript code to do so, thus for now i have made it read-only.
2023-09-27 00:23:09 +00:00
msgctxt "month"
msgid "June"
msgstr "junio"
Add user-defined order to campsite types, options, seasons and carousels I use Sortable, exactly like HTMx’s sorting example does[0]. Had to export the slug or ID of some entries to be able to add it in the hidden input. For forms that use ID instead of slug, had to use an input name other than “id” because otherwise the swap would fail due to bug #1496[1]. It is apparently fixed in a recent version of HTMx, but i did not want to update for fear of behaviour changes. [0]: https://htmx.org/examples/sortable/ [1]: https://github.com/bigskysoftware/htmx/issues/1496
2023-12-20 18:52:14 +00:00
#: pkg/season/admin.go:228
Add the season_calendar relation and table on the admin section This calendar is supposed to be edited by admin users, but do not yet have the complete JavaScript code to do so, thus for now i have made it read-only.
2023-09-27 00:23:09 +00:00
msgctxt "month"
msgid "July"
msgstr "julio"
Add user-defined order to campsite types, options, seasons and carousels I use Sortable, exactly like HTMx’s sorting example does[0]. Had to export the slug or ID of some entries to be able to add it in the hidden input. For forms that use ID instead of slug, had to use an input name other than “id” because otherwise the swap would fail due to bug #1496[1]. It is apparently fixed in a recent version of HTMx, but i did not want to update for fear of behaviour changes. [0]: https://htmx.org/examples/sortable/ [1]: https://github.com/bigskysoftware/htmx/issues/1496
2023-12-20 18:52:14 +00:00
#: pkg/season/admin.go:229
Add the season_calendar relation and table on the admin section This calendar is supposed to be edited by admin users, but do not yet have the complete JavaScript code to do so, thus for now i have made it read-only.
2023-09-27 00:23:09 +00:00
msgctxt "month"
msgid "August"
msgstr "agosto"
Add user-defined order to campsite types, options, seasons and carousels I use Sortable, exactly like HTMx’s sorting example does[0]. Had to export the slug or ID of some entries to be able to add it in the hidden input. For forms that use ID instead of slug, had to use an input name other than “id” because otherwise the swap would fail due to bug #1496[1]. It is apparently fixed in a recent version of HTMx, but i did not want to update for fear of behaviour changes. [0]: https://htmx.org/examples/sortable/ [1]: https://github.com/bigskysoftware/htmx/issues/1496
2023-12-20 18:52:14 +00:00
#: pkg/season/admin.go:230
Add the season_calendar relation and table on the admin section This calendar is supposed to be edited by admin users, but do not yet have the complete JavaScript code to do so, thus for now i have made it read-only.
2023-09-27 00:23:09 +00:00
msgctxt "month"
msgid "September"
msgstr "septiembre"
Add user-defined order to campsite types, options, seasons and carousels I use Sortable, exactly like HTMx’s sorting example does[0]. Had to export the slug or ID of some entries to be able to add it in the hidden input. For forms that use ID instead of slug, had to use an input name other than “id” because otherwise the swap would fail due to bug #1496[1]. It is apparently fixed in a recent version of HTMx, but i did not want to update for fear of behaviour changes. [0]: https://htmx.org/examples/sortable/ [1]: https://github.com/bigskysoftware/htmx/issues/1496
2023-12-20 18:52:14 +00:00
#: pkg/season/admin.go:231
Add the season_calendar relation and table on the admin section This calendar is supposed to be edited by admin users, but do not yet have the complete JavaScript code to do so, thus for now i have made it read-only.
2023-09-27 00:23:09 +00:00
msgctxt "month"
msgid "October"
msgstr "octubre"
Add user-defined order to campsite types, options, seasons and carousels I use Sortable, exactly like HTMx’s sorting example does[0]. Had to export the slug or ID of some entries to be able to add it in the hidden input. For forms that use ID instead of slug, had to use an input name other than “id” because otherwise the swap would fail due to bug #1496[1]. It is apparently fixed in a recent version of HTMx, but i did not want to update for fear of behaviour changes. [0]: https://htmx.org/examples/sortable/ [1]: https://github.com/bigskysoftware/htmx/issues/1496
2023-12-20 18:52:14 +00:00
#: pkg/season/admin.go:232
Add the season_calendar relation and table on the admin section This calendar is supposed to be edited by admin users, but do not yet have the complete JavaScript code to do so, thus for now i have made it read-only.
2023-09-27 00:23:09 +00:00
msgctxt "month"
msgid "November"
msgstr "noviembre"
Add user-defined order to campsite types, options, seasons and carousels I use Sortable, exactly like HTMx’s sorting example does[0]. Had to export the slug or ID of some entries to be able to add it in the hidden input. For forms that use ID instead of slug, had to use an input name other than “id” because otherwise the swap would fail due to bug #1496[1]. It is apparently fixed in a recent version of HTMx, but i did not want to update for fear of behaviour changes. [0]: https://htmx.org/examples/sortable/ [1]: https://github.com/bigskysoftware/htmx/issues/1496
2023-12-20 18:52:14 +00:00
#: pkg/season/admin.go:233
Add the season_calendar relation and table on the admin section This calendar is supposed to be edited by admin users, but do not yet have the complete JavaScript code to do so, thus for now i have made it read-only.
2023-09-27 00:23:09 +00:00
msgctxt "month"
msgid "December"
msgstr "diciembre"
Add management of legal texts
2023-12-22 01:23:18 +00:00
#: pkg/season/admin.go:406
Add seasons’ relation, functions, and admin section Seasons have a color to show on the calendar. I need them in HTML format (e.g., #123abc) in order to set as value to `<input type="color">`, but i did not want to save them as text in the database, as integers are better representations of colors—in fact, that’s what the HTML syntax also is: an integer. I think the best would be to create an extension that adds an HTML color type, with functions to convert from many representations (e.g., CSS’ rgb or even color names) to integer and back. However, that’s a lot of work and i can satisfy Camper’s needs with just a couple of functions and a domain. To show the color on the index, at first tried to use a read-only `<input type="color">`, but seems that this type of input can not be read-only and must be disabled instead. However, i do not know whether it makes sense to have a disabled input outside a form “just” to show a color; i suspect it does not. Thus, at the end i use SVG with a single circle, which is better that a 50%-rounded div with a background color, even if the result is the same—SVG **is** intended for showing pictures, which is this case.
2023-08-16 18:15:57 +00:00
msgid "Color can not be empty."
msgstr "No podéis dejar el color en blanco."
Add management of legal texts
2023-12-22 01:23:18 +00:00
#: pkg/season/admin.go:407
Add seasons’ relation, functions, and admin section Seasons have a color to show on the calendar. I need them in HTML format (e.g., #123abc) in order to set as value to `<input type="color">`, but i did not want to save them as text in the database, as integers are better representations of colors—in fact, that’s what the HTML syntax also is: an integer. I think the best would be to create an extension that adds an HTML color type, with functions to convert from many representations (e.g., CSS’ rgb or even color names) to integer and back. However, that’s a lot of work and i can satisfy Camper’s needs with just a couple of functions and a domain. To show the color on the index, at first tried to use a read-only `<input type="color">`, but seems that this type of input can not be read-only and must be disabled instead. However, i do not know whether it makes sense to have a disabled input outside a form “just” to show a color; i suspect it does not. Thus, at the end i use SVG with a single circle, which is better that a 50%-rounded div with a background color, even if the result is the same—SVG **is** intended for showing pictures, which is this case.
2023-08-16 18:15:57 +00:00
msgid "This color is not valid. It must be like #123abc."
msgstr "Este color no es válido. Tiene que ser parecido a #123abc."
Add management of legal texts
2023-12-22 01:23:18 +00:00
#: pkg/season/admin.go:507
Add max campers and dogs allowed fields to campsite types
2023-09-29 18:17:39 +00:00
msgctxt "action"
msgid "Unset"
msgstr "Desasignar"
Add management of legal texts
2023-12-22 01:23:18 +00:00
#: pkg/season/admin.go:538
Add max campers and dogs allowed fields to campsite types
2023-09-29 18:17:39 +00:00
msgid "Start date can not be empty."
msgstr "No podéis dejar la fecha de inicio en blanco."
Add management of legal texts
2023-12-22 01:23:18 +00:00
#: pkg/season/admin.go:539
Add max campers and dogs allowed fields to campsite types
2023-09-29 18:17:39 +00:00
msgid "Start date must be a valid date."
msgstr "La fecha de inicio tiene que ser una fecha válida."
Add management of legal texts
2023-12-22 01:23:18 +00:00
#: pkg/season/admin.go:541
Add max campers and dogs allowed fields to campsite types
2023-09-29 18:17:39 +00:00
msgid "End date can not be empty."
msgstr "No podéis dejar la fecha final en blanco."
Add management of legal texts
2023-12-22 01:23:18 +00:00
#: pkg/season/admin.go:542
Add max campers and dogs allowed fields to campsite types
2023-09-29 18:17:39 +00:00
msgid "End date must be a valid date."
msgstr "La fecha final tiene que ser una fecha válida."
Add user-defined order to campsite types, options, seasons and carousels I use Sortable, exactly like HTMx’s sorting example does[0]. Had to export the slug or ID of some entries to be able to add it in the hidden input. For forms that use ID instead of slug, had to use an input name other than “id” because otherwise the swap would fail due to bug #1496[1]. It is apparently fixed in a recent version of HTMx, but i did not want to update for fear of behaviour changes. [0]: https://htmx.org/examples/sortable/ [1]: https://github.com/bigskysoftware/htmx/issues/1496
2023-12-20 18:52:14 +00:00
#: pkg/company/admin.go:193 pkg/booking/public.go:256
Add the form to update company’s tax details It is inside the “user menu” only because this is where Numerus has the same option, although it makes less sense in this case, because Numerus is geared toward individual freelancers while Camper is for companies. But, since it is easy to change afterward, this will do for now. However, it should be only shown to admin users, because regular employees have no UPDATE privilege on the company relation. Thus, the need for a new template function to check if the user is admin. Part of #17.
2023-08-15 20:35:21 +00:00
msgid "Selected country is not valid."
msgstr "El país escogido no es válido."
Add the Catalonia’s Tourism Registry number to company It is required to be displayed on the website of tourism companies of Catalonia.
2023-10-14 19:59:36 +00:00
#: pkg/company/admin.go:197
Add the form to update company’s tax details It is inside the “user menu” only because this is where Numerus has the same option, although it makes less sense in this case, because Numerus is geared toward individual freelancers while Camper is for companies. But, since it is easy to change afterward, this will do for now. However, it should be only shown to admin users, because regular employees have no UPDATE privilege on the company relation. Thus, the need for a new template function to check if the user is admin. Part of #17.
2023-08-15 20:35:21 +00:00
msgid "Business name can not be empty."
msgstr "No podéis dejar el nombre de empresa en blanco."
Add the Catalonia’s Tourism Registry number to company It is required to be displayed on the website of tourism companies of Catalonia.
2023-10-14 19:59:36 +00:00
#: pkg/company/admin.go:198
Add the form to update company’s tax details It is inside the “user menu” only because this is where Numerus has the same option, although it makes less sense in this case, because Numerus is geared toward individual freelancers while Camper is for companies. But, since it is easy to change afterward, this will do for now. However, it should be only shown to admin users, because regular employees have no UPDATE privilege on the company relation. Thus, the need for a new template function to check if the user is admin. Part of #17.
2023-08-15 20:35:21 +00:00
msgid "Business name must have at least two letters."
msgstr "El nombre de la empresa tiene que tener como mínimo dos letras."
Add the Catalonia’s Tourism Registry number to company It is required to be displayed on the website of tourism companies of Catalonia.
2023-10-14 19:59:36 +00:00
#: pkg/company/admin.go:200
Add the form to update company’s tax details It is inside the “user menu” only because this is where Numerus has the same option, although it makes less sense in this case, because Numerus is geared toward individual freelancers while Camper is for companies. But, since it is easy to change afterward, this will do for now. However, it should be only shown to admin users, because regular employees have no UPDATE privilege on the company relation. Thus, the need for a new template function to check if the user is admin. Part of #17.
2023-08-15 20:35:21 +00:00
msgid "VAT number can not be empty."
msgstr "No podéis dejar el NIF en blanco."
Add the Catalonia’s Tourism Registry number to company It is required to be displayed on the website of tourism companies of Catalonia.
2023-10-14 19:59:36 +00:00
#: pkg/company/admin.go:201
Add the form to update company’s tax details It is inside the “user menu” only because this is where Numerus has the same option, although it makes less sense in this case, because Numerus is geared toward individual freelancers while Camper is for companies. But, since it is easy to change afterward, this will do for now. However, it should be only shown to admin users, because regular employees have no UPDATE privilege on the company relation. Thus, the need for a new template function to check if the user is admin. Part of #17.
2023-08-15 20:35:21 +00:00
msgid "This VAT number is not valid."
msgstr "Este NIF no es válido."
Add user-defined order to campsite types, options, seasons and carousels I use Sortable, exactly like HTMx’s sorting example does[0]. Had to export the slug or ID of some entries to be able to add it in the hidden input. For forms that use ID instead of slug, had to use an input name other than “id” because otherwise the swap would fail due to bug #1496[1]. It is apparently fixed in a recent version of HTMx, but i did not want to update for fear of behaviour changes. [0]: https://htmx.org/examples/sortable/ [1]: https://github.com/bigskysoftware/htmx/issues/1496
2023-12-20 18:52:14 +00:00
#: pkg/company/admin.go:205 pkg/booking/public.go:272
Add the form to update company’s tax details It is inside the “user menu” only because this is where Numerus has the same option, although it makes less sense in this case, because Numerus is geared toward individual freelancers while Camper is for companies. But, since it is easy to change afterward, this will do for now. However, it should be only shown to admin users, because regular employees have no UPDATE privilege on the company relation. Thus, the need for a new template function to check if the user is admin. Part of #17.
2023-08-15 20:35:21 +00:00
msgid "Phone can not be empty."
msgstr "No podéis dejar el teléfono en blanco."
Add user-defined order to campsite types, options, seasons and carousels I use Sortable, exactly like HTMx’s sorting example does[0]. Had to export the slug or ID of some entries to be able to add it in the hidden input. For forms that use ID instead of slug, had to use an input name other than “id” because otherwise the swap would fail due to bug #1496[1]. It is apparently fixed in a recent version of HTMx, but i did not want to update for fear of behaviour changes. [0]: https://htmx.org/examples/sortable/ [1]: https://github.com/bigskysoftware/htmx/issues/1496
2023-12-20 18:52:14 +00:00
#: pkg/company/admin.go:206 pkg/booking/public.go:273
Add the form to update company’s tax details It is inside the “user menu” only because this is where Numerus has the same option, although it makes less sense in this case, because Numerus is geared toward individual freelancers while Camper is for companies. But, since it is easy to change afterward, this will do for now. However, it should be only shown to admin users, because regular employees have no UPDATE privilege on the company relation. Thus, the need for a new template function to check if the user is admin. Part of #17.
2023-08-15 20:35:21 +00:00
msgid "This phone number is not valid."
msgstr "Este teléfono no es válido."
Add the Catalonia’s Tourism Registry number to company It is required to be displayed on the website of tourism companies of Catalonia.
2023-10-14 19:59:36 +00:00
#: pkg/company/admin.go:214
Add the form to update company’s tax details It is inside the “user menu” only because this is where Numerus has the same option, although it makes less sense in this case, because Numerus is geared toward individual freelancers while Camper is for companies. But, since it is easy to change afterward, this will do for now. However, it should be only shown to admin users, because regular employees have no UPDATE privilege on the company relation. Thus, the need for a new template function to check if the user is admin. Part of #17.
2023-08-15 20:35:21 +00:00
msgid "This web address is not valid. It should be like https://domain.com/."
msgstr "Esta dirección web no es válida. Tiene que ser parecido a https://dominio.com/."
Add the Catalonia’s Tourism Registry number to company It is required to be displayed on the website of tourism companies of Catalonia.
2023-10-14 19:59:36 +00:00
#: pkg/company/admin.go:216
Add the form to update company’s tax details It is inside the “user menu” only because this is where Numerus has the same option, although it makes less sense in this case, because Numerus is geared toward individual freelancers while Camper is for companies. But, since it is easy to change afterward, this will do for now. However, it should be only shown to admin users, because regular employees have no UPDATE privilege on the company relation. Thus, the need for a new template function to check if the user is admin. Part of #17.
2023-08-15 20:35:21 +00:00
msgid "Address can not be empty."
msgstr "No podéis dejar la dirección en blanco."
Add the Catalonia’s Tourism Registry number to company It is required to be displayed on the website of tourism companies of Catalonia.
2023-10-14 19:59:36 +00:00
#: pkg/company/admin.go:217
Add the form to update company’s tax details It is inside the “user menu” only because this is where Numerus has the same option, although it makes less sense in this case, because Numerus is geared toward individual freelancers while Camper is for companies. But, since it is easy to change afterward, this will do for now. However, it should be only shown to admin users, because regular employees have no UPDATE privilege on the company relation. Thus, the need for a new template function to check if the user is admin. Part of #17.
2023-08-15 20:35:21 +00:00
msgid "City can not be empty."
msgstr "No podéis dejar la población en blanco."
Add the Catalonia’s Tourism Registry number to company It is required to be displayed on the website of tourism companies of Catalonia.
2023-10-14 19:59:36 +00:00
#: pkg/company/admin.go:218
Add the form to update company’s tax details It is inside the “user menu” only because this is where Numerus has the same option, although it makes less sense in this case, because Numerus is geared toward individual freelancers while Camper is for companies. But, since it is easy to change afterward, this will do for now. However, it should be only shown to admin users, because regular employees have no UPDATE privilege on the company relation. Thus, the need for a new template function to check if the user is admin. Part of #17.
2023-08-15 20:35:21 +00:00
msgid "Province can not be empty."
msgstr "No podéis dejar la provincia en blanco."
Add the Catalonia’s Tourism Registry number to company It is required to be displayed on the website of tourism companies of Catalonia.
2023-10-14 19:59:36 +00:00
#: pkg/company/admin.go:219
Add the form to update company’s tax details It is inside the “user menu” only because this is where Numerus has the same option, although it makes less sense in this case, because Numerus is geared toward individual freelancers while Camper is for companies. But, since it is easy to change afterward, this will do for now. However, it should be only shown to admin users, because regular employees have no UPDATE privilege on the company relation. Thus, the need for a new template function to check if the user is admin. Part of #17.
2023-08-15 20:35:21 +00:00
msgid "Postal code can not be empty."
msgstr "No podéis dejar el código postal en blanco."
Add user-defined order to campsite types, options, seasons and carousels I use Sortable, exactly like HTMx’s sorting example does[0]. Had to export the slug or ID of some entries to be able to add it in the hidden input. For forms that use ID instead of slug, had to use an input name other than “id” because otherwise the swap would fail due to bug #1496[1]. It is apparently fixed in a recent version of HTMx, but i did not want to update for fear of behaviour changes. [0]: https://htmx.org/examples/sortable/ [1]: https://github.com/bigskysoftware/htmx/issues/1496
2023-12-20 18:52:14 +00:00
#: pkg/company/admin.go:220 pkg/booking/public.go:265
Add the form to update company’s tax details It is inside the “user menu” only because this is where Numerus has the same option, although it makes less sense in this case, because Numerus is geared toward individual freelancers while Camper is for companies. But, since it is easy to change afterward, this will do for now. However, it should be only shown to admin users, because regular employees have no UPDATE privilege on the company relation. Thus, the need for a new template function to check if the user is admin. Part of #17.
2023-08-15 20:35:21 +00:00
msgid "This postal code is not valid."
msgstr "Este código postal no es válido."
Add the Catalonia’s Tourism Registry number to company It is required to be displayed on the website of tourism companies of Catalonia.
2023-10-14 19:59:36 +00:00
#: pkg/company/admin.go:224
msgid "RTC number can not be empty."
msgstr "No podéis dejar el número RTC en blanco."
#: pkg/company/admin.go:225
Add the form to update company’s tax details It is inside the “user menu” only because this is where Numerus has the same option, although it makes less sense in this case, because Numerus is geared toward individual freelancers while Camper is for companies. But, since it is easy to change afterward, this will do for now. However, it should be only shown to admin users, because regular employees have no UPDATE privilege on the company relation. Thus, the need for a new template function to check if the user is admin. Part of #17.
2023-08-15 20:35:21 +00:00
msgid "Selected currency is not valid."
msgstr "La moneda escogida no es válida."
Add the Catalonia’s Tourism Registry number to company It is required to be displayed on the website of tourism companies of Catalonia.
2023-10-14 19:59:36 +00:00
#: pkg/company/admin.go:227
Add the form to update company’s tax details It is inside the “user menu” only because this is where Numerus has the same option, although it makes less sense in this case, because Numerus is geared toward individual freelancers while Camper is for companies. But, since it is easy to change afterward, this will do for now. However, it should be only shown to admin users, because regular employees have no UPDATE privilege on the company relation. Thus, the need for a new template function to check if the user is admin. Part of #17.
2023-08-15 20:35:21 +00:00
msgid "Invoice number format can not be empty."
msgstr "No podéis dejar el formato de número de factura en blanco."
Allow users to update their profile images I do not see the profile image as an “integral part” of the user (i.e., no need for constraints), hence i do not want to store it in the database, as would do for the identification image during check-in. By default, i store the avatars in /var/lib/camper/avatars, but it is a variable to allow packagers change this value using the linker. This is also served as a test bed for uploading files to the server, that now has a better interface and uses less resources that what i did to Numerus. Now the profile handler needs to keep a variable to know the path to the avatars’ directory, thus i had to change it to a struct nested in app, much like the fileHandler does. It still has to return the HandlerFunc, however, as this function needs to close over the user and connection variables. Part of #7.
2023-07-28 18:15:09 +00:00
#: pkg/auth/user.go:40
Add the logout button Conceptually, to logout we have to “delete the session”, thus the best HTTP verb would be `DELETE`. However, there is no way to send a `DELETE` request with a regular HTML form, and it seems that never will be[0]. I could use a POST, optionally with a “method override” technique, but i was planing to use HTMx anyway, so this was as good an opportunity to include it as any. In this application i am not concerned with people not having JavaScript enabled, because it is for a customer that has a known environment, and we do not have much time anyway. Therefore, i opted to forgo progressive enhancement in cases like this: if `DELETE` is needed, use `hx-delete`. Unfortunately, i can not use a <form> with a hidden <input> for the CSRF token, because `DELETE` requests do not have body and the value should be added as query parameters, like a form with GET method, but HTMx does the incorrect thing here: sends the values in the request’s body. That’s why i have to use a custom header and the `hx-header` directive to include the CSRF token. Then, by default HTMx targets the triggered element for swap with the response from the server, but after a logout i want to redirect the user to the login form again. I could set the hx-target to button to replace the whole body, or tell the client to redirect to the new location. I actually do not know which one is “better”. Maybe the hx-target is best because then everything is handled by the client, but in the case of logout, since it is possible that i might want to load scripts only for logged-in users in the future, i opted for the full page reload. However, HTMx does not want to reload a page that return HTTP 401, hence i had to include the GET method to /login in order to return the login form with a response of HTTP 200, which also helps when reloading in the browser after a failed login attempt. I am not worried with the HTTP 401 when attempting to load a page as guest, because this request most probably comes from the browser, not HTMx, and it will show the login form as intended—even though it is not compliant, since it does not return the WWW-Authenticate header, but this is the best i can do given that no cookie-based authentication method has been accepted[1]. [0]: https://www.w3.org/Bugs/Public/show_bug.cgi?id=10671#c16 [1]: https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/id/draft-broyer-http-cookie-auth-00.html
2023-07-26 11:49:47 +00:00
msgid "Cross-site request forgery detected."
msgstr "Se ha detectado un intento de falsificación de petición en sitios cruzados."
Add the Active field to the campsite type’s edit form and function In the new form this field is hidden and always active, because it makes no sense to add an inactive campsite type.
2023-08-14 09:43:58 +00:00
Change media picker from <div> to <dialog> and make it modal Have to call Dialog.showModal when HTMx loaded the dialog in the DOM, so had to add a onLoad event listened that checks whether the loaded element is actually a DIALOG. Had to restrict the margin: 0 for all elements (*) to exclude dialog, because the browser sets it to auto, and i did not want to set it again just because i was too overzealous with my “reset”. The rest of the CSS is just to have a sticky header and footer, and see the cancel button, that works as a “close”, all the time. Finally, i realized that if i add the dialog at the end of the fieldset and let HTMx inherit its hx-target and hx-swap, i no longer need to set them in the dialog, as HTMx will always replace the fieldset, and i can have the dialog side by side the current content of the fieldset, that it was very confusing seeing it disappear when trying to select a new media. The cancel button could now just remove the dialog instead of making the POST, but in local it makes no difference; we’lls see what happens on production.
2023-09-22 00:11:03 +00:00
#: pkg/media/admin.go:265
Add the surroundings static page This page is “highly stylized”, with a masonry-like grid, that i did not know how to generate automatically from data defined in PostgreSQL, therefore with Oriol we agreed to have this one as a static page and we will see what we can do if the customer asks to be able to change it. I was a bit undecided on whether the icons in the bottom part of the page should be defined in the CSS or with style="" and CSS variables, like i do for the campsite type in the home page. At first i thought that it should use CSS variables, mostly for coherence: if another section of the web does it for its background image, why no this one. The difference is that the home page is dynamically created from the database, while this page is static and we know what icons we need, thus it makes more sense to move it to the stylesheet file, because then it will be downloaded by user agents that actually want to use it (e.g., browsers, but not Braille terminals).
2023-09-16 22:11:39 +00:00
msgid "Uploaded file can not be empty."
msgstr "No podéis dejar el archivo del medio en blanco."
Change media picker from <div> to <dialog> and make it modal Have to call Dialog.showModal when HTMx loaded the dialog in the DOM, so had to add a onLoad event listened that checks whether the loaded element is actually a DIALOG. Had to restrict the margin: 0 for all elements (*) to exclude dialog, because the browser sets it to auto, and i did not want to set it again just because i was too overzealous with my “reset”. The rest of the CSS is just to have a sticky header and footer, and see the cancel button, that works as a “close”, all the time. Finally, i realized that if i add the dialog at the end of the fieldset and let HTMx inherit its hx-target and hx-swap, i no longer need to set them in the dialog, as HTMx will always replace the fieldset, and i can have the dialog side by side the current content of the fieldset, that it was very confusing seeing it disappear when trying to select a new media. The cancel button could now just remove the dialog instead of making the POST, but in local it makes no difference; we’lls see what happens on production.
2023-09-22 00:11:03 +00:00
#: pkg/media/admin.go:324
Manage all media uploads in a single place It made no sense to have a file upload in each form that needs a media, because to reuse an existing media users would need to upload the exact same file again; this is very unusual and unfriendly. A better option is to have a “centralized” media section, where people can upload files there, and then have a picker to select from there. Ideally, there would be an upload option in the picker, but i did not add it yet. I’ve split the content from the media because i want users to have the option to update a media, for instance when they need to upload a reduced or cropped version of the same photo, without an edit they would need to upload the file as a new media and then update all places where the old version was used. And i did not want to trouble people that uploads the same photo twice: without the separate relation, doing so would throw a constraint error. I do not believe there is any security problem to have all companies link their media to the same file, as they were already readable by everyone and could upload the data from a different company to their own; in other words, it is not worse than it was now.
2023-09-20 23:56:44 +00:00
msgid "Filename can not be empty."
msgstr "No podéis dejar el nombre del archivo en blanco."
Replace contact page with location Customer does not want a contact page, but a page where they can write the direction on how to reach the campground, with a Google map embed instead of using Leaflet, because Google Maps shows the reviews right in the map. That means i had to replace the GPS locations with XML fields for the customer to write. In all four languages. This time i tried a translation approach inspired by PrestaShop: instead of opening a new page for each language, i have all languages in the same page and use AlpineJS to show just a single language. It is far easier to write the translations, even though you do not have the source text visible, specially in this section that there is no place for me to put the language links.
2023-12-21 20:17:04 +00:00
#: pkg/booking/admin.go:76
Add the payment form to admin Had to change setup_redsys because admins can not read the current encrypt key, thus it is not possible to `set encrypt_key = coalesce(…, encrypt_key)`. Not that it did much sense, anyway, as i was already inside the branch of the if when encrpty_key is null. However, it seems that this also affects in the `on conflict` update. I assume this is because `excluded` is some kind of row of the relation and has the same restrictions.
2023-10-27 14:04:43 +00:00
msgctxt "redsys environment"
msgid "Test"
msgstr "Pruebas"
Replace contact page with location Customer does not want a contact page, but a page where they can write the direction on how to reach the campground, with a Google map embed instead of using Leaflet, because Google Maps shows the reviews right in the map. That means i had to replace the GPS locations with XML fields for the customer to write. In all four languages. This time i tried a translation approach inspired by PrestaShop: instead of opening a new page for each language, i have all languages in the same page and use AlpineJS to show just a single language. It is far easier to write the translations, even though you do not have the source text visible, specially in this section that there is no place for me to put the language links.
2023-12-21 20:17:04 +00:00
#: pkg/booking/admin.go:80
Add the payment form to admin Had to change setup_redsys because admins can not read the current encrypt key, thus it is not possible to `set encrypt_key = coalesce(…, encrypt_key)`. Not that it did much sense, anyway, as i was already inside the branch of the if when encrpty_key is null. However, it seems that this also affects in the `on conflict` update. I assume this is because `excluded` is some kind of row of the relation and has the same restrictions.
2023-10-27 14:04:43 +00:00
msgctxt "redsys environment"
msgid "Live"
msgstr "Real"
Replace contact page with location Customer does not want a contact page, but a page where they can write the direction on how to reach the campground, with a Google map embed instead of using Leaflet, because Google Maps shows the reviews right in the map. That means i had to replace the GPS locations with XML fields for the customer to write. In all four languages. This time i tried a translation approach inspired by PrestaShop: instead of opening a new page for each language, i have all languages in the same page and use AlpineJS to show just a single language. It is far easier to write the translations, even though you do not have the source text visible, specially in this section that there is no place for me to put the language links.
2023-12-21 20:17:04 +00:00
#: pkg/booking/admin.go:89
Add the payment form to admin Had to change setup_redsys because admins can not read the current encrypt key, thus it is not possible to `set encrypt_key = coalesce(…, encrypt_key)`. Not that it did much sense, anyway, as i was already inside the branch of the if when encrpty_key is null. However, it seems that this also affects in the `on conflict` update. I assume this is because `excluded` is some kind of row of the relation and has the same restrictions.
2023-10-27 14:04:43 +00:00
msgctxt "redsys integration"
msgid "InSite"
msgstr "InSite"
Replace contact page with location Customer does not want a contact page, but a page where they can write the direction on how to reach the campground, with a Google map embed instead of using Leaflet, because Google Maps shows the reviews right in the map. That means i had to replace the GPS locations with XML fields for the customer to write. In all four languages. This time i tried a translation approach inspired by PrestaShop: instead of opening a new page for each language, i have all languages in the same page and use AlpineJS to show just a single language. It is far easier to write the translations, even though you do not have the source text visible, specially in this section that there is no place for me to put the language links.
2023-12-21 20:17:04 +00:00
#: pkg/booking/admin.go:93
Add the payment form to admin Had to change setup_redsys because admins can not read the current encrypt key, thus it is not possible to `set encrypt_key = coalesce(…, encrypt_key)`. Not that it did much sense, anyway, as i was already inside the branch of the if when encrpty_key is null. However, it seems that this also affects in the `on conflict` update. I assume this is because `excluded` is some kind of row of the relation and has the same restrictions.
2023-10-27 14:04:43 +00:00
msgctxt "redsys integration"
msgid "Redirect"
msgstr "Redirección"
Replace contact page with location Customer does not want a contact page, but a page where they can write the direction on how to reach the campground, with a Google map embed instead of using Leaflet, because Google Maps shows the reviews right in the map. That means i had to replace the GPS locations with XML fields for the customer to write. In all four languages. This time i tried a translation approach inspired by PrestaShop: instead of opening a new page for each language, i have all languages in the same page and use AlpineJS to show just a single language. It is far easier to write the translations, even though you do not have the source text visible, specially in this section that there is no place for me to put the language links.
2023-12-21 20:17:04 +00:00
#: pkg/booking/admin.go:137
Add the payment form to admin Had to change setup_redsys because admins can not read the current encrypt key, thus it is not possible to `set encrypt_key = coalesce(…, encrypt_key)`. Not that it did much sense, anyway, as i was already inside the branch of the if when encrpty_key is null. However, it seems that this also affects in the `on conflict` update. I assume this is because `excluded` is some kind of row of the relation and has the same restrictions.
2023-10-27 14:04:43 +00:00
msgid "Merchant code can not be empty."
msgstr "No podéis dejar el código del comercio en blanco."
Replace contact page with location Customer does not want a contact page, but a page where they can write the direction on how to reach the campground, with a Google map embed instead of using Leaflet, because Google Maps shows the reviews right in the map. That means i had to replace the GPS locations with XML fields for the customer to write. In all four languages. This time i tried a translation approach inspired by PrestaShop: instead of opening a new page for each language, i have all languages in the same page and use AlpineJS to show just a single language. It is far easier to write the translations, even though you do not have the source text visible, specially in this section that there is no place for me to put the language links.
2023-12-21 20:17:04 +00:00
#: pkg/booking/admin.go:138
Add the payment form to admin Had to change setup_redsys because admins can not read the current encrypt key, thus it is not possible to `set encrypt_key = coalesce(…, encrypt_key)`. Not that it did much sense, anyway, as i was already inside the branch of the if when encrpty_key is null. However, it seems that this also affects in the `on conflict` update. I assume this is because `excluded` is some kind of row of the relation and has the same restrictions.
2023-10-27 14:04:43 +00:00
msgid "Merchant code must be exactly nine digits long."
msgstr "El código del comercio tiene que ser de nueve dígitos."
Replace contact page with location Customer does not want a contact page, but a page where they can write the direction on how to reach the campground, with a Google map embed instead of using Leaflet, because Google Maps shows the reviews right in the map. That means i had to replace the GPS locations with XML fields for the customer to write. In all four languages. This time i tried a translation approach inspired by PrestaShop: instead of opening a new page for each language, i have all languages in the same page and use AlpineJS to show just a single language. It is far easier to write the translations, even though you do not have the source text visible, specially in this section that there is no place for me to put the language links.
2023-12-21 20:17:04 +00:00
#: pkg/booking/admin.go:139
Add the payment form to admin Had to change setup_redsys because admins can not read the current encrypt key, thus it is not possible to `set encrypt_key = coalesce(…, encrypt_key)`. Not that it did much sense, anyway, as i was already inside the branch of the if when encrpty_key is null. However, it seems that this also affects in the `on conflict` update. I assume this is because `excluded` is some kind of row of the relation and has the same restrictions.
2023-10-27 14:04:43 +00:00
msgid "Merchant code must be a number."
msgstr "El código del comercio tiene que ser un número."
Replace contact page with location Customer does not want a contact page, but a page where they can write the direction on how to reach the campground, with a Google map embed instead of using Leaflet, because Google Maps shows the reviews right in the map. That means i had to replace the GPS locations with XML fields for the customer to write. In all four languages. This time i tried a translation approach inspired by PrestaShop: instead of opening a new page for each language, i have all languages in the same page and use AlpineJS to show just a single language. It is far easier to write the translations, even though you do not have the source text visible, specially in this section that there is no place for me to put the language links.
2023-12-21 20:17:04 +00:00
#: pkg/booking/admin.go:143
Add the payment form to admin Had to change setup_redsys because admins can not read the current encrypt key, thus it is not possible to `set encrypt_key = coalesce(…, encrypt_key)`. Not that it did much sense, anyway, as i was already inside the branch of the if when encrpty_key is null. However, it seems that this also affects in the `on conflict` update. I assume this is because `excluded` is some kind of row of the relation and has the same restrictions.
2023-10-27 14:04:43 +00:00
msgid "Terminal number can not be empty."
msgstr "No podéis dejar el número de terminal en blanco."
Replace contact page with location Customer does not want a contact page, but a page where they can write the direction on how to reach the campground, with a Google map embed instead of using Leaflet, because Google Maps shows the reviews right in the map. That means i had to replace the GPS locations with XML fields for the customer to write. In all four languages. This time i tried a translation approach inspired by PrestaShop: instead of opening a new page for each language, i have all languages in the same page and use AlpineJS to show just a single language. It is far easier to write the translations, even though you do not have the source text visible, specially in this section that there is no place for me to put the language links.
2023-12-21 20:17:04 +00:00
#: pkg/booking/admin.go:144
Add the payment form to admin Had to change setup_redsys because admins can not read the current encrypt key, thus it is not possible to `set encrypt_key = coalesce(…, encrypt_key)`. Not that it did much sense, anyway, as i was already inside the branch of the if when encrpty_key is null. However, it seems that this also affects in the `on conflict` update. I assume this is because `excluded` is some kind of row of the relation and has the same restrictions.
2023-10-27 14:04:43 +00:00
msgid "Terminal number must be a number between 1 and 999."
msgstr "El número de terminal tiene que ser entre 1 y 999."
Replace contact page with location Customer does not want a contact page, but a page where they can write the direction on how to reach the campground, with a Google map embed instead of using Leaflet, because Google Maps shows the reviews right in the map. That means i had to replace the GPS locations with XML fields for the customer to write. In all four languages. This time i tried a translation approach inspired by PrestaShop: instead of opening a new page for each language, i have all languages in the same page and use AlpineJS to show just a single language. It is far easier to write the translations, even though you do not have the source text visible, specially in this section that there is no place for me to put the language links.
2023-12-21 20:17:04 +00:00
#: pkg/booking/admin.go:152
Add the payment form to admin Had to change setup_redsys because admins can not read the current encrypt key, thus it is not possible to `set encrypt_key = coalesce(…, encrypt_key)`. Not that it did much sense, anyway, as i was already inside the branch of the if when encrpty_key is null. However, it seems that this also affects in the `on conflict` update. I assume this is because `excluded` is some kind of row of the relation and has the same restrictions.
2023-10-27 14:04:43 +00:00
msgid "Selected environment is not valid."
msgstr "El entorno escogido no es válido."
Replace contact page with location Customer does not want a contact page, but a page where they can write the direction on how to reach the campground, with a Google map embed instead of using Leaflet, because Google Maps shows the reviews right in the map. That means i had to replace the GPS locations with XML fields for the customer to write. In all four languages. This time i tried a translation approach inspired by PrestaShop: instead of opening a new page for each language, i have all languages in the same page and use AlpineJS to show just a single language. It is far easier to write the translations, even though you do not have the source text visible, specially in this section that there is no place for me to put the language links.
2023-12-21 20:17:04 +00:00
#: pkg/booking/admin.go:153
Add the payment form to admin Had to change setup_redsys because admins can not read the current encrypt key, thus it is not possible to `set encrypt_key = coalesce(…, encrypt_key)`. Not that it did much sense, anyway, as i was already inside the branch of the if when encrpty_key is null. However, it seems that this also affects in the `on conflict` update. I assume this is because `excluded` is some kind of row of the relation and has the same restrictions.
2023-10-27 14:04:43 +00:00
msgid "Selected integration is not valid."
msgstr "La integración escogida no es válida."
Replace contact page with location Customer does not want a contact page, but a page where they can write the direction on how to reach the campground, with a Google map embed instead of using Leaflet, because Google Maps shows the reviews right in the map. That means i had to replace the GPS locations with XML fields for the customer to write. In all four languages. This time i tried a translation approach inspired by PrestaShop: instead of opening a new page for each language, i have all languages in the same page and use AlpineJS to show just a single language. It is far easier to write the translations, even though you do not have the source text visible, specially in this section that there is no place for me to put the language links.
2023-12-21 20:17:04 +00:00
#: pkg/booking/admin.go:156
Add the payment form to admin Had to change setup_redsys because admins can not read the current encrypt key, thus it is not possible to `set encrypt_key = coalesce(…, encrypt_key)`. Not that it did much sense, anyway, as i was already inside the branch of the if when encrpty_key is null. However, it seems that this also affects in the `on conflict` update. I assume this is because `excluded` is some kind of row of the relation and has the same restrictions.
2023-10-27 14:04:43 +00:00
msgid "The merchant key is not valid."
msgstr "Esta clave del comercio no es válida."
Add user-defined order to campsite types, options, seasons and carousels I use Sortable, exactly like HTMx’s sorting example does[0]. Had to export the slug or ID of some entries to be able to add it in the hidden input. For forms that use ID instead of slug, had to use an input name other than “id” because otherwise the swap would fail due to bug #1496[1]. It is apparently fixed in a recent version of HTMx, but i did not want to update for fear of behaviour changes. [0]: https://htmx.org/examples/sortable/ [1]: https://github.com/bigskysoftware/htmx/issues/1496
2023-12-20 18:52:14 +00:00
#: pkg/booking/public.go:260
Add the first draft of the booking and payment forms The form is based on the one in the current website, but in a single page instead of split into many pages; possibly each <fieldset> should be in a separate page/view. The idea is for Oriol to check the design and decide how it would be presented to the user, so i needed something to show him first. I hardcoded the **test** data for the customer’s Redsys account. Is this bad? I hope not, but i am not really, really sure. The data sent to Redsys is just a placeholder because there are booking details that i do not know, like what i have to do with the “teenagers” field or the area preferences, thus i can not yet have a booking relation. Nevertheless, had to generate a random order number up to 12-chars in length or Redsys would refuse the payment, claiming that the order is duplicated. The Redsys package is based on the PHP code provided by Redsys themselves, plus some hints at the implementations from various Go packages that did not know why they were so complicated. Had to grant select on table country to guest in order to show the select with the country options. I have changed the “Postal code” input in taxDetails for “Postcode” because this is the spell that it is used in the current web, i did not see a reason to change it—it is an accepted form—, and i did not want to have inconsistencies between forms.
2023-10-19 19:37:34 +00:00
msgid "Full name can not be empty."
msgstr "No podéis dejar el nombre y los apellidos en blanco."
Add user-defined order to campsite types, options, seasons and carousels I use Sortable, exactly like HTMx’s sorting example does[0]. Had to export the slug or ID of some entries to be able to add it in the hidden input. For forms that use ID instead of slug, had to use an input name other than “id” because otherwise the swap would fail due to bug #1496[1]. It is apparently fixed in a recent version of HTMx, but i did not want to update for fear of behaviour changes. [0]: https://htmx.org/examples/sortable/ [1]: https://github.com/bigskysoftware/htmx/issues/1496
2023-12-20 18:52:14 +00:00
#: pkg/booking/public.go:261
Add the first draft of the booking and payment forms The form is based on the one in the current website, but in a single page instead of split into many pages; possibly each <fieldset> should be in a separate page/view. The idea is for Oriol to check the design and decide how it would be presented to the user, so i needed something to show him first. I hardcoded the **test** data for the customer’s Redsys account. Is this bad? I hope not, but i am not really, really sure. The data sent to Redsys is just a placeholder because there are booking details that i do not know, like what i have to do with the “teenagers” field or the area preferences, thus i can not yet have a booking relation. Nevertheless, had to generate a random order number up to 12-chars in length or Redsys would refuse the payment, claiming that the order is duplicated. The Redsys package is based on the PHP code provided by Redsys themselves, plus some hints at the implementations from various Go packages that did not know why they were so complicated. Had to grant select on table country to guest in order to show the select with the country options. I have changed the “Postal code” input in taxDetails for “Postcode” because this is the spell that it is used in the current web, i did not see a reason to change it—it is an accepted form—, and i did not want to have inconsistencies between forms.
2023-10-19 19:37:34 +00:00
msgid "Full name must have at least one letter."
msgstr "El nombre y los apellidos tienen que tener como mínimo una letra."
Add user-defined order to campsite types, options, seasons and carousels I use Sortable, exactly like HTMx’s sorting example does[0]. Had to export the slug or ID of some entries to be able to add it in the hidden input. For forms that use ID instead of slug, had to use an input name other than “id” because otherwise the swap would fail due to bug #1496[1]. It is apparently fixed in a recent version of HTMx, but i did not want to update for fear of behaviour changes. [0]: https://htmx.org/examples/sortable/ [1]: https://github.com/bigskysoftware/htmx/issues/1496
2023-12-20 18:52:14 +00:00
#: pkg/booking/public.go:279
Add the first draft of the booking and payment forms The form is based on the one in the current website, but in a single page instead of split into many pages; possibly each <fieldset> should be in a separate page/view. The idea is for Oriol to check the design and decide how it would be presented to the user, so i needed something to show him first. I hardcoded the **test** data for the customer’s Redsys account. Is this bad? I hope not, but i am not really, really sure. The data sent to Redsys is just a placeholder because there are booking details that i do not know, like what i have to do with the “teenagers” field or the area preferences, thus i can not yet have a booking relation. Nevertheless, had to generate a random order number up to 12-chars in length or Redsys would refuse the payment, claiming that the order is duplicated. The Redsys package is based on the PHP code provided by Redsys themselves, plus some hints at the implementations from various Go packages that did not know why they were so complicated. Had to grant select on table country to guest in order to show the select with the country options. I have changed the “Postal code” input in taxDetails for “Postcode” because this is the spell that it is used in the current web, i did not see a reason to change it—it is an accepted form—, and i did not want to have inconsistencies between forms.
2023-10-19 19:37:34 +00:00
msgid "Arrival date can not be empty"
msgstr "No podéis dejar la fecha de llegada en blanco."
Add user-defined order to campsite types, options, seasons and carousels I use Sortable, exactly like HTMx’s sorting example does[0]. Had to export the slug or ID of some entries to be able to add it in the hidden input. For forms that use ID instead of slug, had to use an input name other than “id” because otherwise the swap would fail due to bug #1496[1]. It is apparently fixed in a recent version of HTMx, but i did not want to update for fear of behaviour changes. [0]: https://htmx.org/examples/sortable/ [1]: https://github.com/bigskysoftware/htmx/issues/1496
2023-12-20 18:52:14 +00:00
#: pkg/booking/public.go:280
Add the first draft of the booking and payment forms The form is based on the one in the current website, but in a single page instead of split into many pages; possibly each <fieldset> should be in a separate page/view. The idea is for Oriol to check the design and decide how it would be presented to the user, so i needed something to show him first. I hardcoded the **test** data for the customer’s Redsys account. Is this bad? I hope not, but i am not really, really sure. The data sent to Redsys is just a placeholder because there are booking details that i do not know, like what i have to do with the “teenagers” field or the area preferences, thus i can not yet have a booking relation. Nevertheless, had to generate a random order number up to 12-chars in length or Redsys would refuse the payment, claiming that the order is duplicated. The Redsys package is based on the PHP code provided by Redsys themselves, plus some hints at the implementations from various Go packages that did not know why they were so complicated. Had to grant select on table country to guest in order to show the select with the country options. I have changed the “Postal code” input in taxDetails for “Postcode” because this is the spell that it is used in the current web, i did not see a reason to change it—it is an accepted form—, and i did not want to have inconsistencies between forms.
2023-10-19 19:37:34 +00:00
msgid "Arrival date must be a valid date."
msgstr "La fecha de llegada tiene que ser una fecha válida."
Add user-defined order to campsite types, options, seasons and carousels I use Sortable, exactly like HTMx’s sorting example does[0]. Had to export the slug or ID of some entries to be able to add it in the hidden input. For forms that use ID instead of slug, had to use an input name other than “id” because otherwise the swap would fail due to bug #1496[1]. It is apparently fixed in a recent version of HTMx, but i did not want to update for fear of behaviour changes. [0]: https://htmx.org/examples/sortable/ [1]: https://github.com/bigskysoftware/htmx/issues/1496
2023-12-20 18:52:14 +00:00
#: pkg/booking/public.go:284
Add the first draft of the booking and payment forms The form is based on the one in the current website, but in a single page instead of split into many pages; possibly each <fieldset> should be in a separate page/view. The idea is for Oriol to check the design and decide how it would be presented to the user, so i needed something to show him first. I hardcoded the **test** data for the customer’s Redsys account. Is this bad? I hope not, but i am not really, really sure. The data sent to Redsys is just a placeholder because there are booking details that i do not know, like what i have to do with the “teenagers” field or the area preferences, thus i can not yet have a booking relation. Nevertheless, had to generate a random order number up to 12-chars in length or Redsys would refuse the payment, claiming that the order is duplicated. The Redsys package is based on the PHP code provided by Redsys themselves, plus some hints at the implementations from various Go packages that did not know why they were so complicated. Had to grant select on table country to guest in order to show the select with the country options. I have changed the “Postal code” input in taxDetails for “Postcode” because this is the spell that it is used in the current web, i did not see a reason to change it—it is an accepted form—, and i did not want to have inconsistencies between forms.
2023-10-19 19:37:34 +00:00
msgid "Departure date can not be empty"
msgstr "No podéis dejar la fecha de partida en blanco."
Add user-defined order to campsite types, options, seasons and carousels I use Sortable, exactly like HTMx’s sorting example does[0]. Had to export the slug or ID of some entries to be able to add it in the hidden input. For forms that use ID instead of slug, had to use an input name other than “id” because otherwise the swap would fail due to bug #1496[1]. It is apparently fixed in a recent version of HTMx, but i did not want to update for fear of behaviour changes. [0]: https://htmx.org/examples/sortable/ [1]: https://github.com/bigskysoftware/htmx/issues/1496
2023-12-20 18:52:14 +00:00
#: pkg/booking/public.go:285
Add the first draft of the booking and payment forms The form is based on the one in the current website, but in a single page instead of split into many pages; possibly each <fieldset> should be in a separate page/view. The idea is for Oriol to check the design and decide how it would be presented to the user, so i needed something to show him first. I hardcoded the **test** data for the customer’s Redsys account. Is this bad? I hope not, but i am not really, really sure. The data sent to Redsys is just a placeholder because there are booking details that i do not know, like what i have to do with the “teenagers” field or the area preferences, thus i can not yet have a booking relation. Nevertheless, had to generate a random order number up to 12-chars in length or Redsys would refuse the payment, claiming that the order is duplicated. The Redsys package is based on the PHP code provided by Redsys themselves, plus some hints at the implementations from various Go packages that did not know why they were so complicated. Had to grant select on table country to guest in order to show the select with the country options. I have changed the “Postal code” input in taxDetails for “Postcode” because this is the spell that it is used in the current web, i did not see a reason to change it—it is an accepted form—, and i did not want to have inconsistencies between forms.
2023-10-19 19:37:34 +00:00
msgid "Departure date must be a valid date."
msgstr "La fecha de partida tiene que ser una fecha válida."
Add user-defined order to campsite types, options, seasons and carousels I use Sortable, exactly like HTMx’s sorting example does[0]. Had to export the slug or ID of some entries to be able to add it in the hidden input. For forms that use ID instead of slug, had to use an input name other than “id” because otherwise the swap would fail due to bug #1496[1]. It is apparently fixed in a recent version of HTMx, but i did not want to update for fear of behaviour changes. [0]: https://htmx.org/examples/sortable/ [1]: https://github.com/bigskysoftware/htmx/issues/1496
2023-12-20 18:52:14 +00:00
#: pkg/booking/public.go:286
Add the first draft of the booking and payment forms The form is based on the one in the current website, but in a single page instead of split into many pages; possibly each <fieldset> should be in a separate page/view. The idea is for Oriol to check the design and decide how it would be presented to the user, so i needed something to show him first. I hardcoded the **test** data for the customer’s Redsys account. Is this bad? I hope not, but i am not really, really sure. The data sent to Redsys is just a placeholder because there are booking details that i do not know, like what i have to do with the “teenagers” field or the area preferences, thus i can not yet have a booking relation. Nevertheless, had to generate a random order number up to 12-chars in length or Redsys would refuse the payment, claiming that the order is duplicated. The Redsys package is based on the PHP code provided by Redsys themselves, plus some hints at the implementations from various Go packages that did not know why they were so complicated. Had to grant select on table country to guest in order to show the select with the country options. I have changed the “Postal code” input in taxDetails for “Postcode” because this is the spell that it is used in the current web, i did not see a reason to change it—it is an accepted form—, and i did not want to have inconsistencies between forms.
2023-10-19 19:37:34 +00:00
msgid "The departure date must be after the arrival date."
msgstr "La fecha de partida tiene que ser posterior a la de llegada."
Add user-defined order to campsite types, options, seasons and carousels I use Sortable, exactly like HTMx’s sorting example does[0]. Had to export the slug or ID of some entries to be able to add it in the hidden input. For forms that use ID instead of slug, had to use an input name other than “id” because otherwise the swap would fail due to bug #1496[1]. It is apparently fixed in a recent version of HTMx, but i did not want to update for fear of behaviour changes. [0]: https://htmx.org/examples/sortable/ [1]: https://github.com/bigskysoftware/htmx/issues/1496
2023-12-20 18:52:14 +00:00
#: pkg/booking/public.go:289
Add the first draft of the booking and payment forms The form is based on the one in the current website, but in a single page instead of split into many pages; possibly each <fieldset> should be in a separate page/view. The idea is for Oriol to check the design and decide how it would be presented to the user, so i needed something to show him first. I hardcoded the **test** data for the customer’s Redsys account. Is this bad? I hope not, but i am not really, really sure. The data sent to Redsys is just a placeholder because there are booking details that i do not know, like what i have to do with the “teenagers” field or the area preferences, thus i can not yet have a booking relation. Nevertheless, had to generate a random order number up to 12-chars in length or Redsys would refuse the payment, claiming that the order is duplicated. The Redsys package is based on the PHP code provided by Redsys themselves, plus some hints at the implementations from various Go packages that did not know why they were so complicated. Had to grant select on table country to guest in order to show the select with the country options. I have changed the “Postal code” input in taxDetails for “Postcode” because this is the spell that it is used in the current web, i did not see a reason to change it—it is an accepted form—, and i did not want to have inconsistencies between forms.
2023-10-19 19:37:34 +00:00
msgid "It is mandatory to agree to the reservation conditions."
msgstr "Es obligatorio aceptar las condiciones de reserva."
Add user-defined order to campsite types, options, seasons and carousels I use Sortable, exactly like HTMx’s sorting example does[0]. Had to export the slug or ID of some entries to be able to add it in the hidden input. For forms that use ID instead of slug, had to use an input name other than “id” because otherwise the swap would fail due to bug #1496[1]. It is apparently fixed in a recent version of HTMx, but i did not want to update for fear of behaviour changes. [0]: https://htmx.org/examples/sortable/ [1]: https://github.com/bigskysoftware/htmx/issues/1496
2023-12-20 18:52:14 +00:00
#: pkg/booking/public.go:292
Implement Redsys request signature in PostgreSQL Every company need to have its own merchant code and encryption key, thus it is not possible to use environment variables to keep that data, and i have to store it in the database. I do not want to give SELECT permission on the encryption key to guest, because i am going to fuck it up sooner or later, and everyone would be able to read that secret; i know it would. Therefore, i need a security definer function that takes the data to encrypt, use the key to encrypt it, and returns the result; nobody else should have access to that key, not even admins! By the way, i found out that every merchant receives the same key, thus it is not a problem to keep it in the repository. Since i need that SQL function to encrypt the data, i thought that i may go the whole nine yards and sign the request in PostgreSQL too, after all the data to sign comes from there, and it has JSON functions to create and base64-code an object. Fortunately, pg_crypto has all the functions that i need, but i can no longer keep that extension inside the auth schema, because it is used from others, and the public schema, like every other extensions, seems more appropriate. Instead of having the list of currency and language codes that Redsys uses as constants in the code, i moved that as field to the currency and language relations, so i can simply pass the lang_tag to the function and it can transform that tag to the correct code; the currency is from the company’s relation, since it is the only currency used in the whole application (for now). As a consequence, i had to grant execute to currency and the parse_price functions to guest, too. To generate the test data used in the unit tests, i used a third-party PHP implementation[0], but i only got from that the resulting base64-coded JSON object and signature, using the same that as in the unit test, and did not use any code from there. PostgreSQL formats the JSON as text differently than most implementations i have seen: it adds spaces between the key name and the colons, and space between the value and the separating comma. The first implementation used replace() to format the JSON as exactly as the PHP implementation, so that the result matches, and then tried to do generate the form by hand using the output from PostgreSQL without the replace(), to verify that Redsys would still accept my input. Finally, i adjusted the unit test to whatever pg_prove said it was getting from the function. I still have the form’s action hard-codded to the test environment, but the idea is that administrators should be able to switch from test to live themselves. That means that i need that info in the redsys relation as well. I think this is one of the few use cases for SQL’s types, because it is unlikely to change anytime soon, and i do not need the actual labels. Unfortunately, i could not use enumerations for the request’s transaction type because i can not attach an arbitrary number to the enum’s values. Having a relation is overkill, because i would need a constant in Go to refer to its primary key anyway, thus i kept the same constant i had before for that. Language and currency constant went out, as this is in the corresponding relations. In setup_redsys i must have a separate update if the encrypt_key is null because PostgreSQL checks constraints before key conflict, and i do not want to give a default value to the key if the row is not there yet. The problem is that i want to use null to mean “keep the same password”, because it is what i intend to do with the user-facing form: leave the input empty to keep the same password. As now Go needs to pass composite types back and forth with PostgreSQL, i need to register these types, and i have to do it every time because the only moment i have access to the non-pooled connection is in the AfterConnect function, but at that point i have no idea whether the user is going to request a payment. I do not know how much the performance degrades because of this. [0]: https://github.com/ssheduardo/sermepa/blob/master/src/Sermepa/Tpv/Tpv.php
2023-10-26 23:52:04 +00:00
#, c-format
Add the first draft of the booking and payment forms The form is based on the one in the current website, but in a single page instead of split into many pages; possibly each <fieldset> should be in a separate page/view. The idea is for Oriol to check the design and decide how it would be presented to the user, so i needed something to show him first. I hardcoded the **test** data for the customer’s Redsys account. Is this bad? I hope not, but i am not really, really sure. The data sent to Redsys is just a placeholder because there are booking details that i do not know, like what i have to do with the “teenagers” field or the area preferences, thus i can not yet have a booking relation. Nevertheless, had to generate a random order number up to 12-chars in length or Redsys would refuse the payment, claiming that the order is duplicated. The Redsys package is based on the PHP code provided by Redsys themselves, plus some hints at the implementations from various Go packages that did not know why they were so complicated. Had to grant select on table country to guest in order to show the select with the country options. I have changed the “Postal code” input in taxDetails for “Postcode” because this is the spell that it is used in the current web, i did not see a reason to change it—it is an accepted form—, and i did not want to have inconsistencies between forms.
2023-10-19 19:37:34 +00:00
msgid "%s can not be empty"
msgstr "No podéis dejar %s en blanco."
Add user-defined order to campsite types, options, seasons and carousels I use Sortable, exactly like HTMx’s sorting example does[0]. Had to export the slug or ID of some entries to be able to add it in the hidden input. For forms that use ID instead of slug, had to use an input name other than “id” because otherwise the swap would fail due to bug #1496[1]. It is apparently fixed in a recent version of HTMx, but i did not want to update for fear of behaviour changes. [0]: https://htmx.org/examples/sortable/ [1]: https://github.com/bigskysoftware/htmx/issues/1496
2023-12-20 18:52:14 +00:00
#: pkg/booking/public.go:293
Add the first draft of the booking and payment forms The form is based on the one in the current website, but in a single page instead of split into many pages; possibly each <fieldset> should be in a separate page/view. The idea is for Oriol to check the design and decide how it would be presented to the user, so i needed something to show him first. I hardcoded the **test** data for the customer’s Redsys account. Is this bad? I hope not, but i am not really, really sure. The data sent to Redsys is just a placeholder because there are booking details that i do not know, like what i have to do with the “teenagers” field or the area preferences, thus i can not yet have a booking relation. Nevertheless, had to generate a random order number up to 12-chars in length or Redsys would refuse the payment, claiming that the order is duplicated. The Redsys package is based on the PHP code provided by Redsys themselves, plus some hints at the implementations from various Go packages that did not know why they were so complicated. Had to grant select on table country to guest in order to show the select with the country options. I have changed the “Postal code” input in taxDetails for “Postcode” because this is the spell that it is used in the current web, i did not see a reason to change it—it is an accepted form—, and i did not want to have inconsistencies between forms.
2023-10-19 19:37:34 +00:00
#, c-format
msgid "%s must be an integer."
msgstr "%s tiene que ser un número entero."
Add user-defined order to campsite types, options, seasons and carousels I use Sortable, exactly like HTMx’s sorting example does[0]. Had to export the slug or ID of some entries to be able to add it in the hidden input. For forms that use ID instead of slug, had to use an input name other than “id” because otherwise the swap would fail due to bug #1496[1]. It is apparently fixed in a recent version of HTMx, but i did not want to update for fear of behaviour changes. [0]: https://htmx.org/examples/sortable/ [1]: https://github.com/bigskysoftware/htmx/issues/1496
2023-12-20 18:52:14 +00:00
#: pkg/booking/public.go:294
Add the first draft of the booking and payment forms The form is based on the one in the current website, but in a single page instead of split into many pages; possibly each <fieldset> should be in a separate page/view. The idea is for Oriol to check the design and decide how it would be presented to the user, so i needed something to show him first. I hardcoded the **test** data for the customer’s Redsys account. Is this bad? I hope not, but i am not really, really sure. The data sent to Redsys is just a placeholder because there are booking details that i do not know, like what i have to do with the “teenagers” field or the area preferences, thus i can not yet have a booking relation. Nevertheless, had to generate a random order number up to 12-chars in length or Redsys would refuse the payment, claiming that the order is duplicated. The Redsys package is based on the PHP code provided by Redsys themselves, plus some hints at the implementations from various Go packages that did not know why they were so complicated. Had to grant select on table country to guest in order to show the select with the country options. I have changed the “Postal code” input in taxDetails for “Postcode” because this is the spell that it is used in the current web, i did not see a reason to change it—it is an accepted form—, and i did not want to have inconsistencies between forms.
2023-10-19 19:37:34 +00:00
#, c-format
msgid "%s must be %d or greater."
msgstr "%s tiene que ser como mínimo %d."
Add user-defined order to campsite types, options, seasons and carousels I use Sortable, exactly like HTMx’s sorting example does[0]. Had to export the slug or ID of some entries to be able to add it in the hidden input. For forms that use ID instead of slug, had to use an input name other than “id” because otherwise the swap would fail due to bug #1496[1]. It is apparently fixed in a recent version of HTMx, but i did not want to update for fear of behaviour changes. [0]: https://htmx.org/examples/sortable/ [1]: https://github.com/bigskysoftware/htmx/issues/1496
2023-12-20 18:52:14 +00:00
#: pkg/booking/public.go:295
Add the first draft of the booking and payment forms The form is based on the one in the current website, but in a single page instead of split into many pages; possibly each <fieldset> should be in a separate page/view. The idea is for Oriol to check the design and decide how it would be presented to the user, so i needed something to show him first. I hardcoded the **test** data for the customer’s Redsys account. Is this bad? I hope not, but i am not really, really sure. The data sent to Redsys is just a placeholder because there are booking details that i do not know, like what i have to do with the “teenagers” field or the area preferences, thus i can not yet have a booking relation. Nevertheless, had to generate a random order number up to 12-chars in length or Redsys would refuse the payment, claiming that the order is duplicated. The Redsys package is based on the PHP code provided by Redsys themselves, plus some hints at the implementations from various Go packages that did not know why they were so complicated. Had to grant select on table country to guest in order to show the select with the country options. I have changed the “Postal code” input in taxDetails for “Postcode” because this is the spell that it is used in the current web, i did not see a reason to change it—it is an accepted form—, and i did not want to have inconsistencies between forms.
2023-10-19 19:37:34 +00:00
#, c-format
msgid "%s must be at most %d."
msgstr "%s tiene que ser como máximo %d"
Replace use of L10NInput with I18nInput for campsite
2024-01-10 20:52:49 +00:00
#~ msgctxt "title"
Use I18nInput instead of L10nInput to translate carousels
2024-01-12 18:33:44 +00:00
#~ msgid "Translate Carousel Slide to %s"
#~ msgstr "Traducción de la diapositiva de carrusel a %s"
#~ msgctxt "title"
Replace use of L10NInput with I18nInput for campsite
2024-01-10 20:52:49 +00:00
#~ msgid "Translate Campsite Type Feature to %s"
#~ msgstr "Traducción de la característica del tipo de alojamiento a %s"
#~ msgctxt "title"
#~ msgid "Translate Campsite Type Carousel Slide to %s"
#~ msgstr "Traducción de la diapositiva de carrusel del tipo de alojamiento a %s"
#~ msgctxt "title"
#~ msgid "Translate Campsite Type Option to %s"
#~ msgstr "Traducción de la opción del tipo de alojamiento a %s"
#~ msgctxt "title"
#~ msgid "Translate Campsite Type to %s"
#~ msgstr "Traducción de tipo de alojamiento a %s"
Updated translations
2023-12-22 02:32:40 +00:00
#~ msgid "Starting from %s €/night"
#~ msgstr "A partir de %s €/noche"
#~ msgctxt "season"
#~ msgid "Closed"
#~ msgstr "Cerrado"
Remove “Party Details” from booking form, and stylize it a bit
2023-12-12 22:16:04 +00:00
#~ msgctxt "title"
#~ msgid "Party Details"
#~ msgstr "Datos de los visitantes"
#~ msgctxt "input"
#~ msgid "Adults"
#~ msgstr "Adultos"
#~ msgctxt "input"
#~ msgid "Teenagers (from 11 to 16 years old)"
#~ msgstr "Adolescentes (de 11 a 16 años)"
#~ msgctxt "input"
#~ msgid "Children (up to 10 years old)"
#~ msgstr "Niños (hasta 10 años)"
#~ msgctxt "input"
#~ msgid "Dogs"
#~ msgstr "Perros"
#~ msgid "Number of adults can not be empty"
#~ msgstr "No podéis dejar el número de adultos blanco."
#~ msgid "Number of adults must be an integer."
#~ msgstr "El número de adultos tiene que ser entero."
#~ msgid "Number of adults must be one or greater."
#~ msgstr "El número de adultos no puede ser cero."
#~ msgid "Number of teenagers can not be empty"
#~ msgstr "No podéis dejar el número de adolescentes en blanco."
#~ msgid "Number of teenagers must be an integer."
#~ msgstr "El número de adolescentes tiene que ser entero."
#~ msgid "Number of teenagers must be zero or greater."
#~ msgstr "El número de adolescentes tiene que ser como mínimo cero."
#~ msgid "Number of children can not be empty"
#~ msgstr "No podéis dejar el número de niños en blanco."
#~ msgid "Number of children must be an integer."
#~ msgstr "El número de niños tiene que ser entero."
#~ msgid "Number of children must be zero or greater."
#~ msgstr "El número de niños tiene que ser como mínimo cero."
#~ msgid "Number of dogs can not be empty"
#~ msgstr "No podéis dejar el número de perros en blanco."
#~ msgid "Number of dogs must be an integer."
#~ msgstr "El número de perros tiene que ser entero."
#~ msgid "Number of dogs must be zero or greater."
#~ msgstr "El número de perros tiene que ser como mínimo cero."
Add the info and facilities fields to campsite type I wish CKEditor would have support for <dl>, but it is unlikely that they will add any time soon[0], specially when in 2018 they already “forgotten”[1] that this was requested back in 2007[2]. Therefore, in the demo i did it more or less like in the original design, with “extra” <h4>, although i added them under a <h3>, to avoid “gaps” in the outline. [0]: https://github.com/ckeditor/ckeditor5/issues/775 [1]: https://github.com/ckeditor/ckeditor5/issues/775#issuecomment-358591747 [2]: https://dev.ckeditor.com/ticket/1333
2023-10-13 11:40:48 +00:00
#~ msgctxt "title"
#~ msgid "Pricing"
#~ msgstr "Precios"
#~ msgctxt "input"
#~ msgid "Pricing"
#~ msgstr "Precios"
#~ msgctxt "input"
#~ msgid "Features"
#~ msgstr "Características"
Change “singular lodges” menu item to just “campsites”
2023-10-06 16:58:24 +00:00
#~ msgid "Singular Lodges"
#~ msgstr "Alojamientos singulares"
Add campsite type options, mainly for plots
2023-10-06 11:26:01 +00:00
#~ msgctxt "campsite type"
#~ msgid "Translations"
#~ msgstr "Traducciones"
Add the services page This page is more or less similar to home, in terms of database: it has a carousel and a list of items; in this case, the definition of campsite services. As i said early, when adding the home carousel, this carousel has its own relation and set of functions to manage slides. They are also duplicated in Go code, but i think i will need to refactor it later to a carousel package or something like that, because both relations have the exact same fields and types, so it makes no sense to have twice the same code. I already did it with the CSS and JavaScript code, mostly because it was easier to replace the `.surroundings div` selector with `.carousel`, and because that way i can have a single template that loads and initializes Slick. There is no UI to create or edit service definitions, although there are the SQL functions, because i have no more time now, and Oriol needs to check that the style is correct for that page.
2023-09-17 01:42:16 +00:00
#~ msgid "Surroundings"
#~ msgstr "Entorno"
Make home page’s carousel manageable via the database I debated with myself whether to create the home_carousel relation or rather if it would be better to have a single carousel relation for all pages. However, i thought that it would be actually harder to maintain a single relation because i would need an additional column to tell one carrousel from another, and what would that column be? An enum? A foreign key to another relation? home_carousel carries no such issues. I was starting to duplicate logic all over the packages, such as the way to encode media paths or “localization” (l10n) input fields. Therefore, i refactorized them. In the case of media path, i added a function that accepts rows of media, because always need the same columns from the row, and it was yet another repetition if i needed to pass them all the time. Plus, these kind of functions can be called as `table.function`, that make them look like columns from the table; if PostgreSQL implemented virtual generated columns, i would have used that instead. I am not sure whether that media_path function can be immutable. An immutable function is “guaranteed to return the same results given the same arguments forever”, which would be true if the inputs where the hash and the original_filename columns, instead of the whole rows, but i left it as static because i did not know whether PostgreSQL interprets the “same row but with different values” as a different input. That is, whether PostgreSQL’s concept of row is the actual tuple or the space that has a rowid, irrespective of contents; in the latter case, the function can not be immutable. Just to be in the safe side, i left it stable. The home page was starting to grow a bit too much inside the app package, new that it has its own admin handler, and moved it all to a separate package.
2023-09-14 23:05:38 +00:00
#~ msgid "Legend"
#~ msgstr "Leyenda"
Add the Active field to the campsite type’s edit form and function In the new form this field is hidden and always active, because it makes no sense to add an inactive campsite type.
2023-08-14 09:43:58 +00:00
#~ msgctxt "input"
#~ msgid "Title"
#~ msgstr "Título"
#~ msgctxt "title"
#~ msgid "Pages"
#~ msgstr "Páginas"
#~ msgctxt "action"
#~ msgid "Add Page"
#~ msgstr "Añadir página"
#~ msgctxt "header"
#~ msgid "Title"
#~ msgstr "Título"